BA01954C/07/EN/03.23-00
716259992023-08-24

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.07.00

Operating Instructions
Liquiline CM44P
Universal four-wire multichannel controller for process
spectrometers and Memosens sensors

Liquiline CM44P

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

8.1
8.2
8.3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Access to operating menu via local display . . . 56
Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2

Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

9Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Requirements of the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User definable screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

3

Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.1
3.2
3.3

Housing closed (field device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Open?? device with sensor communication
module type 2DS Ex-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview (cabinet device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Slot and port assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Terminal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.4
3.5
3.6

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.1
4.2
4.3

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

5.1
5.2

5.4

Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the measuring device (fielddevice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the measuring device (cabinet
device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8

Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting additional inputs, outputs orrelays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RS 485 . 44
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 49
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

7

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

7.1
7.2
7.3

Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fieldbus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

5.3

Endress+Hauser

17
21
26
29

59
59
60
61

10.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10.2 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
10.3 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.4 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.5 Binary inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.6 Additional functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

11

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

11.1
11.2

Calibration instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CAL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

12

Diagnosis and troubleshooting . . . . 135

12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.2 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 136
12.3 Diagnostic information via web browser . . . . 136
12.4 Diagnostic information via fieldbus . . . . . . . . 136
12.5 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 136
12.6 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 138
12.7 Pending diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.8 Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.9 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.10 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.11 Device test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

13

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

13.1

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

14

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

15.1
15.2

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 177
3

Table of contents

Liquiline CM44P

15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
15.5 Other accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

16Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

16.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
16.2 Digital inputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16.3 Current input, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16.5 Digital outputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.6 Current outputs, active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.7 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.8 Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.9 Energy supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
16.10 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16.11 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
16.12 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

4

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

About this document

1

About this document

1.1

Warnings

Structure of information

Meaning

LDANGERThis symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation will result in a fatal or serious
injury.

Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LWARNING
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LCAUTION
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action
NOTICE
Cause/situation
If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Action/note

1.2
SymbolThis symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation can result in a fatal or serious
injury.

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid this situation can result in minor or more serious injuries.

This symbol alerts you to situations which may result in damage toproperty.

Symbols
Meaning
Additional information, tips
Permitted or recommended
Recommended
Not permitted or not recommended
Reference to device documentation
Reference to page
Reference to graphic

1.3
SymbolResult of a step

Symbols on the device
Meaning
Reference to device documentation

Do not dispose of products bearing this marking as unsorted municipal
waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for disposal under theapplicable conditions.

Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Liquiline CM44P

1.4

Documentation

The following manuals complement these Operating Instructions and are available on the
product pages on the Internet:• Brief Operating Instructions for Liquiline CM44P, KA01450C• Operating Instructions for Memosens, BA01245C• Software description for Memosens inputs• Calibration of Memosens sensors• Sensor-specific diagnostics and troubleshooting• Operating Instructions for HART communication, BA00486C• Onsite settings and installation instructions for HART
• Description of HART driver• Guidelines for communication via fieldbus and web server• HART, SD01187C• PROFIBUS, SD01188C• Modbus, SD01189C• Web server, SD01190C• EtherNet/IP, SD01293C• PROFINET, SD02490C

6

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Basic safety instructions

2

Basic safety instructions

2.1

Requirements of the personnel• Installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the measuring system may
be carried out only by specially trained technical personnel.
• The technical personnel must be authorized by the plant operator to carry out the
specified activities.
• The electrical connection may be performed only by an electrical technician.
• The technical personnel must have read and understood these Operating Instructions
and must follow the instructions contained therein.
• Faults at the measuring point may only be rectified by authorized and specially trained
personnel.
Repairs not described in the Operating Instructions provided must be carried out only
directly at the manufacturer's site or by the service organization.

2.2

Intended use

2.2.1

Non-hazardous environment

Liquiline CM44P is a multichannel controller for connecting process spectrometers anddigital sensors with Memosens technology in non-hazardous environments.
The device is designed for use in the following applications:• Food and beverages• Life science• Water and wastewater• Chemical industry• Power stations• Other industrial applications

2.2.2
Hazardous environment‣ Pay attention to the information in the relevant documents relating to safety
instructions (XA).

2.2.3

Non-intended use and improper use

NOTICE
Objects stored on top of the housing
May cause short-circuits or fire or result in the failure of individual cabinet components orcomplete failure of the measuring point!
‣ Never place any objects, such as tools, cables, paper, food, liquid containers or similar,
on top of the housing.
‣ Always observe the operator's regulations, in particular with regard to fire safety(smoking) and foodstuffs (beverages).
Use of the device for any purpose other than that described, poses a threat to the safety ofpeople and of the entire measuring system and is therefore not permitted.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.

Endress+Hauser

7Basic safety instructions

Liquiline CM44P

2.2.4

Installation environment (cabinet device only)

The device and the associated power units can be operated with 24 V AC, 24 V DC or 100
to 230 V AC and comply with IP20.
The components were designed for pollution degree 2 and for environments with noncondensing moisture. They must therefore be installed in an appropriate enclosure forprotection. The ambient conditions specified in the instructions must be observed here.

2.3

Workplace safety

As the user, you are responsible for complying with the following safety conditions:• Installation guidelines• Local standards and regulations• Regulations for explosion protection
Electromagnetic compatibility• The product has been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with theapplicable international standards for industrial applications.
• The electromagnetic compatibility indicated applies only to a product that has beenconnected in accordance with these Operating Instructions.

2.4

Operational safety

Before commissioning the entire measuring point:
1.

Verify that all connections are correct.

2.

Ensure that electrical cables and hose connections are undamaged.

3.

Do not operate damaged products, and protect them against unintentional operation.

4.

Label damaged products as defective.

During operation:‣ If faults cannot be rectified:products must be taken out of service and protected against unintentional operation.

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.

8

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Basic safety instructions

2.5

Product safety

2.5.1

State-of-the-art

The product is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, andleft the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The relevant regulations andinternational standards have been observed.

2.5.2

IT security

We only provide a warranty if the device is installed and used as described in the
Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect itagainst any inadvertent changes to the device settings.
IT security measures in line with operators' security standards and designed to provide
additional protection for the device and device data transfer must be implemented by theoperators themselves.

Endress+Hauser

9Device description

Liquiline CM44P

3

Device description

3.1

Housing closed (field device)

1

2

6

5

1

Display2

Weather protection cover (optional)

3

Navigator

4

Sensor cable or current output cable5

Power supply cable

6

Soft keys, assignment depends on menu

3

4A0025813

1

Mounted on a post

3.2

Standard device

3.2.1

Housing open (field device)
1

11

2

10

3

8

9

5

4

6

7

A0039719

2
1

Display cable

7

Threaded bolt for protective ground connection

2

Basic module

8

Extension power unit with internal cable

3

Extension modules (optional)

9

M12 connectors for sensor connection(optional)

4

Shock protection, dummy cover and end cover10

Distributor terminals for user-defined use 1)

5

Extension backplane

11

Storage slot for SD card

6

Cable mounting rail

1)

10

Example of a four-channel device with an open display cover (without wiring)

Example: you want to loop the signal from the alarm relay to a siren and a lamp. The terminals on thealarm relay only accommodate one cable. Route the signal from the alarm relay to a terminal on the
distributor block. The block's terminals are all interconnected. You therefore have 3 additional terminals on
this block from where you can carry the signal forward to the consumer (siren, lamp etc.). The signal canbe multiplied in this way.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Device description

3.3

Open?? device with sensor communication module
type 2DS Ex-i
1

11

2

3

9

10

4

5

8

6

7
A0045639

3

Example of a field device with sensor communication module type 2DS Ex-i and open display cover(without wiring)1

Display cable

7

Cable mounting rail2

Basic module8

Threaded bolt for protective ground connection

3

Extension modules (optional)

9

Extension power unit

4

Separation element (pre-installed)

10

Distributor terminals for user-defined use 1)

5

Sensor communication modules 2DS Ex-i

11

Storage slot for SD card

6

Shock protection, dummy cover and end cover1)

Endress+Hauser

Example: you want to loop the signal from the alarm relay to a siren and a lamp. The terminals on thealarm relay only accommodate one cable. Route the signal from the alarm relay to a terminal on the
distributor block. The block's terminals are all interconnected. You therefore have 3 additional terminals on
this block from where you can carry the signal forward to the consumer (siren, lamp etc.). The signal canbe multiplied in this way.

11

Device description

Liquiline CM44P

3.4

Overview (cabinet device)

Cabinet device for non-hazardous area
1

2

5

3

4

A0039727

4

Device with optional, external display (excluding cables)1

Base module4

Terminal strip

2

Shock protection, dummy module

5

External power unit

3

External display (optional)

Cabinet device with sensor communication module 2DS Ex-i for hazardous area
1

2

3

4

7

5

6

A0053743

121

Base module

5

External display (optional)

2

Separator element (pre-installed)

6

Terminal strip

3

Shock protection, dummy module

7

External power unit

4

Intrinsically safe sensor connections 2DS Ex-i

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Device description

3.5

Slot and port assignment
Slots
4R

1

2AO

1

2AI

Ports

2
3

Sensor 1
Sensor 2

4

Sensor 1
Sensor 2

Sensor 1
Sensor 2

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

2DS

1

2DS

1

2DS

1

BASE2-E

5

Slot and port assignment of the hardware modules• Inputs are assigned to measuring channels in theascending order of the slots and ports.
Adjacent example:"CH1: 1:1 pH glass" means:
Channel 1 (CH1) is slot 1 (basic module) : Port 1 (input1), pH glass sensor• Outputs and relays are named according to theirfunction, e.g. "current output", and are displayed inascending order with the slot and port numbers

6

Endress+Hauser

Slot and port assignment on thedisplay13

Device description

Liquiline CM44P

3.6

Terminal diagram
The unique terminal name is derived from:
Slot no. : Port no. : Terminal

Example, NO contact of a relay
Device with 2 inputs for digital sensors, 4 current outputs and 4 relays• Base module BASE2-E (contains 2 sensor inputs, 2 current outputs)• SEM module (1 spectrometer)• 2AO module (2 current outputs)• 4R module (4 relays)
Slot

1

2

3

4

Relay 1

Slot 4

Port 1 Pin 41

Relay 3
Relay 4

Relay 243 42 41
43 42 41

43 42 41

43 42 41

BASE2-E

A0041836

7

14Creating a terminal diagram using the example of the NO contact (terminal 41) of a relay

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance1.

Verify that the packaging is undamaged.
 Notify the supplier of any damage to the packaging.
Keep the damaged packaging until the issue has been resolved.

2.

Verify that the contents are undamaged.
 Notify the supplier of any damage to the delivery contents.
Keep the damaged goods until the issue has been resolved.

3.

Check that the delivery is complete and nothing is missing.
 Compare the shipping documents with your order.

4.

Pack the product for storage and transportation in such a way that it is protectedagainst impact and moisture.
 The original packaging offers the best protection.
Make sure to comply with the permitted ambient conditions.

If you have any questions, please contact your supplier or your local Sales Center.

4.2

Product identification

4.2.1

Nameplate

The nameplate provides you with the following information on your device:• Manufacturer identification• Order code
• Extended order code
• Serial number• Firmware version• Ambient conditions• Input and output values• Activation codes• Safety information and warnings• Degree of protection‣ Compare the information on the nameplate with the order.
4.2.2

Identifying the productProduct pagewww.endress.com/cm44p
Interpreting the order code
The order code and serial number of your product can be found in the following locations:• On the nameplate• In the delivery papers
Obtaining information on the productEndress+Hauser

1.

Go to www.endress.com.

2.

Page search (magnifying glass symbol): Enter valid serial number.

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Liquiline CM44P

3.

Search (magnifying glass).
 The product structure is displayed in a popup window.

4.

Click the product overview.
 A new window opens. Here you fill information pertaining to your device,including the product documentation.

Manufacturer address
Endress+Hauser Conducta GmbH+Co. KG
Dieselstraße 24
70839 Gerlingen
Germany

4.3

Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery comprises:• 1 multichannel controller in the version ordered• 1 mounting plate• 1 wiring label (attached at the factory to the inside of the display cover)• 1 external display (if selected as an option) 1)• 1 DIN rail power unit incl. cable (cabinet device only)• 1 printed copy of the Operating Instructions for the DIN rail power unit (cabinet deviceonly)• 1 printed copy of the Brief Operating Instructions in the language ordered• Separation element (pre-installed on hazardous area version type 2DS Ex-i)• Safety instructions for the hazardous area (for hazardous area version type 2DS Ex-i)‣ If you have any queries:
Please contact your supplier or local sales center.

1)

16

The external display can be selected as an option in the order structure or ordered as an accessory at a later stage.

Endress+Hauser

Mounting

Mounting

5.1

Mounting requirements

5.1.1

Dimensions

H

5
C

6

7
E

D

8

I

F

G

A
1

2

3

4

Ø4 (0.16)

5

14 (0.55)
162 (6.38)

Liquiline CM44P

BØ9 (0.35)
199 (7.38)

128 (5.04)

194 (7.64)

76 (2.99)

95 (3.74)

237 (9.33)
A0012396

Mounting plate

170 (6.69)

5.1.2

Dimensions of field housing in mm (in)190 (7.48)

880 (3.15)
125 (4.92)

3 (0.12)4 x 6.5 (0.26)

A0012426

9Endress+Hauser

Mounting plate. Engineering unit: mm (in)17

Mounting

Liquiline CM44P

5.1.3

Weather protection cover

NOTICE
Effect of climatic conditions (rain, snow, direct sunlight etc.)
Impaired operation to complete transmitter failure are possible!
‣ Always use the weather protection cover (accessory) when installing the device
outdoors.
300 (11.8)
170 (6.69)
80 (3.15)

320 (12.6)

170 (6.69)

80 (3.15)

270 (10.6)

8 x Ø 7 (0.28)
A0012428 1018

Dimensions in mm (in)Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

5.1.4

Dimensions (cabinet device)

75 (2.95)

114 (4.49)
100 (3.94)

205.5 (8.09)

TS 35

7.5 (0.30)

91 (3.58)

89 (3.50)

97 (3.82)

TS 35

220 (8.66)
A0039730

 11

5.1.5

Dimensions in mm (inch)

Mounting on DIN rail as per IEC 60715

LCAUTION
The power unit can get very hot under full load
Burn hazard!
‣ Avoid touching the power unit during operation.
‣ The minimum distances to other devices must be observed.
‣ After switching off the power unit, allow it to cool down before carrying out any workon it.

Endress+Hauser

19

Mounting

Liquiline CM44PLCAUTION
Condensation on the device
Risk to user safety!
‣ The device complies with the IP20 degree of protection. It is designed only forenvironments with non-condensing moisture.
‣ Comply with the specified ambient conditions,e.g. by installing the device in an
appropriate protective enclosure.
NOTICE
Incorrect mounting location in the cabinet, spacing regulations not observed
Possible malfunctions as a result of heat buildup and interference from neighboring
devices!
‣ Do not position the device directly above sources of heat. The temperature specificationmust be observed.
‣ The components are designed for convection-based cooling. Avoid heat buildup. Ensure
openings are not covered, e.g. by cables.
‣ Observe the specified distances to other devices.
‣ Physically separate the device from frequency converters and high-voltage devices.
‣ Recommended installation direction: horizontal. The specified ambient conditions, andparticularly the ambient temperatures, only apply for horizontal installation.
‣ Vertical orientation is also possible. However, this requires additional fixing clips at theplace of installation to hold the device in position on the DIN rail.
‣ Recommended installation of power unit: to the left of the devicemin. 20 (0.79)
min. 20 (0.79)

min. 50 (1.97)

min. 50 (1.97)

The following minimum clearance specifications must be observed:• Distances at the side in relation to other devices incl. power units and to the wall of thecabinet:at least 20 mm (0.79 inch)• Distance above and below the device and depth distance (to control cabinet door or otherdevices installed there):at least 50 mm (1.97 inch)min. 50 (1.97)

A0039736 12

20

Minimum clearance in mm (in)Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

5.1.6

Wall mounting

75 (2.95)

100 (3.94)

205.5 (8.09)

4 x Ø 4.5 (0.18)

A0027859

 13

Drilling pattern for wall mounting in mm (in)5.1.7

Mounting the external display

The mounting plate also serves as the drilling template. The marks on the side help
you mark the position of the drill holes.
140 (5.51)
105 (4.13)
4 x min. Ø 8 (0.31)

140 (5.51)

amin. Ø 15 (0.59)

105 (4.13)bbA0025371

 14ab

Mounting plate of external display, dimensions in mm (in)Retaining tab
Production-related recesses, no function for the user

5.1.8

Cable length for optional display

Length of display cable provided (cabinet device only):
3 m (10 ft)
Maximum permitted length of a display cable (cabinet device only):
5 m (16.5 ft)

5.2

Mounting the measuring device (field device)

5.2.1

Post mounting

You require the post mounting kit (optional) to mount the unit on a pipe, post or
railing (square or circular, clamping range 20 to 61 mm (0.79 to 2.40")).

Endress+Hauser

21

Mounting

Liquiline CM44P

1

2

3

4

8

7

6

5
A0033044

 15

Post mounting

1

Weather protection cover (optional)

5

Spring washers and nuts (post mounting kit)2

Post mounting plate (post mounting kit)

6

Pipe or railing (circular/square)3

Spring washers and nuts (post mounting kit)

7

Mounting plate

4

Pipe clamps (post mounting kit)

8

Threaded rods (post mounting kit)

A0033045

 16

22

Post mounting

A0025885

 17

Attach the device and click it into place

1.

Place the device on the mounting plate.

2.

Slide the device downwards in the guide on the mounting rail until it clicks into place.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

5.2.2

Rail mounting
1

2

3

4

7

6

5

9

8

A0012668

 18Rail mounting

1

Weather protection cover (optional)

6

Pipe or railing (circular/square)2

Post mounting plate (post mounting kit)

7

Mounting plate3

Spring washers and nuts (post mounting kit)

8

Threaded rods (post mounting kit)

4

Pipe clamps (post mounting kit)

9

Screws (post mounting kit)5

Spring washers and nuts (post mounting kit)

A0025886 19

Endress+Hauser

Rail mounting

A0027803

 20

Attach the device and click it into place

1.

Place the device on the mounting plate.

2.

Slide the device downwards in the guide on the mounting rail until it clicks into place.

23

Mounting

Liquiline CM44P

Wall mounting≥ 340 (13.4)

1

2≥ 150 (5.91)

5.2.3

4

3
A0027798

A0012686

 21

Installation clearance in mm (in)

 22
1
2
3
4

Wall mountingWall
4 drill holes 1)
Mounting plate
Screws Ø 6 mm (not part of scope of supply)

1)The size of the drill holes depends on the wall plugs used. The wall plugs and screws must be provided by thecustomer.

A0027799

 23

Wall mounting

A0027797

 24

Attach the device and click it into place

1.

Place the device on the mounting plate.

2.

Slide the device downwards in the guide on the mounting rail until it clicks into place.

5.2.4

Disassembly (for conversion, cleaning etc.)

NOTICEThe device can be damaged if dropped‣ When pushing the housing out of the holder, secure the housing to prevent it fromfalling. If possible, ask a second person to help you.

24

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

A0025890

 25

Endress+Hauser

Disassembling

A0025891

 26

Disassembling1.

Hold down the latch.

2.

Push up the device to remove it from the holder.

3.

Remove the device towards the front.

25

Mounting

Liquiline CM44P

5.3

Mounting the measuring device (cabinet device)

5.3.1

DIN rail mounting

The mounting procedure is the same for all Liquiline devices. The example shows a
CM448R.
1.

In the order configuration, the securing clips are "tightened" to secure the DIN rail.
Release the securing clips by pulling them downwards.
2.

Attach the device from the top to the DIN rail (a) and secure it by pressing down (b).

a
b

3.

Slide the securing clips upwards until they click, thereby securing the device to the
DIN rail.


4.

Mount the external power unit in the same way.

5.3.2

Wall mounting

Mounting material (screws, dowels) are not included in the scope of delivery and must
be provided by the customer.
The external power unit can be mounted on a DIN rail only.
Use the back of the housing to mark the mounting holes.

26

1.

Drill the corresponding holes and insert wall plugs if necessary.

2.

Screw the housing onto the wall.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

5.3.3

Mounting the optional external display

LCAUTION
Sharp-edged, non-deburred boreholes
Risk of injury, display cable may get damaged!
‣ Trim and deburr all boreholes. In particular, make sure that the middle borehole for the
display cable is properly deburred.
Mounting the display on the door of the cabinet
1.

Hold the mounting plate from the outside against the door of the control cabinet.
Select the position at which the display is to be mounted.
2.

Make all the markings.
3.
.

.

.

.

.

.
.

.

.

.
.

.

Draw lines to interconnect all the marks.
 The points of intersection of the lines mark the position of the 5 necessary
boreholes.

Endress+Hauser

27

Mounting

Liquiline CM44P

4.

.

.

.

4 x Ø 8 (0.31)

.

.

.
.

.

Ø 20 (0.79)

.

.
.

 27

.

Diameter of boreholes in mm (in)Drill the holes. →  14,  21
5.

Pull the display cable through the central borehole.
6.

With the Torx screws unscrewed until the last half turn (but still inserted), fit thedisplay from the outside via the 4 outer boreholes. Ensure that the rubber frame(seal, highlighted blue) does not become damaged and is properly positioned on thesurface of the door.

7.

Connect the display cable to the RJ-45 socket of the base module. The RJ-45 socket islabeled Display.

28

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Mounting

8.

a
c
b

Place the mounting plate on the inside over the screws (a), slide it down (b) andtighten the screws (c).
 The display is now mounted and ready to use.

 28

Mounted display

NOTICE
Incorrect installation
Damage and malfunctions possible‣ Lay cables in such a way that they do not get squashed e.g. when closing the cabinet
door.
Only
connect the display cable to the RJ45 socket with the Display labeling on the base‣module.

5.4

Endress+Hauser

Post-mounting check1.

After installation, check the transmitter for damage.

2.

Check whether the transmitter is protected against precipitation and direct sunlight(e.g. by the weather protection cover).

3.

After mounting, check all devices (controller, power unit, display) for damage.

4.

Verify that the specified installation clearances have been observed.

5.

Verify that all securing clips have been snapped into place and that the components
are securely positioned on the DIN rail.

6.

Ensure that the temperature limits are observed at the mounting location.

29Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

6.1

Connection conditions

6.1.1

Via HART (e.g. via HART modem and FieldCare)

31
32

250 ... 500 Ω

6

2
USB

1

3
A0039620

 29
1
2
3

HART using modem

Device module Base2-L, -H or -E: current output 1 with HART
HART modem for connection to PC, e.g. Commubox FXA191 (RS232) or FXA195 1) (USB)
HART handheld terminal

1) Switch position "on" (substitutes the resistor)

6.2

Connecting the measuring device

LWARNING
Device is live!
Incorrect connection may result in injury or death!
‣ The electrical connection may be performed only by an electrical technician.
‣ The electrical technician must have read and understood these Operating Instructions
and must follow the instructions contained therein.
‣ Prior to commencing connection work, ensure that no voltage is present on any cable.
NOTICEThe device does not have a power switch!
‣ Provide a protected circuit breaker in the vicinity of the device at the place ofinstallation.
‣ The circuit breaker must be a switch or power switch, and must be labeled as the circuit
breaker for the device.
‣ At the supply point, the power supply must be isolated from dangerous live cables by
double or reinforced insulation in the case of devices with a 24 V supply voltage.

6.2.1

Opening the housing

NOTICE
Pointed or sharp tools
The use of unsuitable tools can cause scratches on the housing or damage to the seal, andtherefore negatively affect the leak-tightness of the housing!
‣ Do not use any sharp or pointed objects, e.g. a knife, to open the housing.
‣ Only use a suitable Phillips screwdriver.

30

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

2.

3.

4.

1.

≤180°

Endress+Hauser

 30

Slacken the housing screws crosswise with a
Phillips head screwdriver1.

Slacken the housing screws crosswise.

2.

To close the housing: tighten the screws in a similar step-by-step, crosswise
sequence.

 31

Opening display cover, max. opening angle
180˚ (depends on installation position)31Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.2.2

Cable mounting rail

1

2

3
A0048299

 32

Cable mounting rail and associated function (field device) 33

Mounting rail for functional ground connections (cabinet device)

A0025366

1

Cable mounting rail

2

Threaded bolt (protective ground connection,
central grounding point)

6.2.3

3

Cable clamps (fixing and grounding the sensor
cables)Connecting the cable shield

The sensor, fieldbus and Ethernet cables must be shielded cables.
Only use terminated original cables where possible.
Clamping range of cable clamps: 4 to 11 mm (0.16 to 0.43 in)Cable sample (does not necessarily correspond to the original cable supplied)

1

2

3
4

 34
1
2
3

32

Terminated cableOuter shield (exposed)
Cable cores with ferrules
Cable sheath (insulation)

A0045763 35
4Connect the cable to thegrounding clamp

Grounding clamp

A0045764

 36

Press the cable into thegrounding clamp

The cable shield is grounded using
the grounding clamp 1)

1)

Please note the instructions in the "Ensuring the degree of protection" section (→  49)

1.

Loosen a suitable cable gland on the bottom of the housing.

2.

Remove the dummy plug.

3.

Attach the gland to the cable end, making sure the gland is facing the right direction.

4.

Pull the cable through the gland and into the housing.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

5.

Route the cable in the housing in such a way that the exposed cable shield fits into
one of the cable clamps and the cable cores can be easily routed as far as theconnection plug on the electronics module.

6.

Connect the cable to the cable clamp.

7.

Clamp the cable.

8.

Connect cable cores as per the wiring diagram.

9.

Tighten the cable gland from outside.

6.2.4

Cable terminals

Plug-in terminals for Memosens and PROFIBUS/RS485 connections‣ Press the screwdriver against
the clip (opens the terminal).

‣ Insert the cable until the limit
stop.

‣ Remove the screwdriver (closes
the terminal).

After connection, make sure that every cable end is securely in place. Terminatedcable ends, in particular, tend to come loose easily if they have not been correctly
inserted as far as the limit stop.
All other plug-in terminals‣ Press the screwdriver against
the clip (opens the terminal).

Endress+Hauser‣ Insert the cable until the limit
stop.

‣ Remove the screwdriver (closes
the terminal).

33

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

87 87
88 88
97 97
98 98

BN +
WH –
GN A
YE B

31 +
32 –
31 +
32 –

1
2

Sensor 2

Ethernet

+ BN
– WH
A GN
B YE
0/4 ... 20 mA

Power(internal)

A

HART

Sensor 1

Alarm

41
42
43

SD

85 +
86 –
85 +
86 –
Service

1 PK
GY
2 PK
GY

Display

Connecting supply voltage

Sensor supply

6.2.5

L+ N- PEPower

B

L/+ N/– PE

B

L/+ N/– *A0039626

BN +
WH –
GN A
YE B

31 +
32 –
31 +
32 –

1
2

Sensor 2

Ethernet

87 87
88 88
97 97
98 98

HART

N

+ BN
– WH
A GN
B YE
0/4 ... 20 mA

Power(internal)

+ RD
- BK
L

85 +
86 –
85 +
86 –
41
42
43

Alarm

*

1 PK
GY
2 PK
GY

SD

Internal power supply cable
Extension power unit

DisplayComplete wiring diagram using the example of
the BASE2-E and extension power supply unit
(B)

Service 38

Sensor supply

A
B

Connecting the power supply using theexample of the BASE2-E (field device)

Sensor 1

 37

A0039624

Power

L/+ N/– PE

B

L/+ N/– *A0039624

A0039668

 39*

Connecting the power supply using theexample of the BASE2-E (cabinet device)

Assignment depends on power supply unit; makesure it is correctly connected.

 40Complete wiring diagram using the example of
the BASE2-E andexternal power supply unit (B)The two device versions may only be operated with the power unit supplied and thepower unit cable. Also pay attention to the information in the operating instructions
supplied for the power unit.

34

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

Connecting the supply voltage
1.

Route the power supply cable into the housing through the suitable cable entry.

2.

Connect the protective ground of the power unit to the threaded bolt speciallyprovided on the cable mounting rail.

3.

Protective ground or grounding provided at the installation location: provide aground cable (min. 0.75 mm2 (corresponding to 18 AWG))1) ! Also guide the groundcable through the cable entry and connect it to the threaded bolt on the cablemounting rail. Tighten the nut to 1 Nm.

4.

Connect the cable cores L and N (100 to 230 V AC) or + and ‐ (24 V DC) to the plugin terminals on the power unit in accordance with the wiring diagram.

1

 41

1)

2

3

4

5

1

Protective ground of power unit

2

Serrated washer and nut

3

Protective ground/ground cable, provided at the
installation location (min. 0.75 mm2 ( 18 AWG)) 1)

4

Serrated washer and nut

5

Mounting bolts

Protective ground or grounding
connection
For a fuse with a 10 A rating. For a fuse with a rating of 16 A, the protective ground / ground cable musthave a cross-sectional area of at least 1.5 mm2 ( 14 AWG).

NOTICE
Protective ground/ground cable with end sleeve or open cable lug
Loosening the nuts on the protective ground (2) results in loss of the protective function!
‣ To connect the protective ground or ground cable to the threaded bolt, only use a cablewith a closed cable lug as per DIN 46211, 46225, form A.
‣ Make sure that the nut of the ground cable is tightened to 1 Nm.
‣ Never connect the protective ground or ground cable to the threaded bolt with an end
sleeve or an open cable lug!
NOTICE
Incorrect connection and cable run not separate
Interference on signal or display cable, incorrect measured values or failure of display may
occur!
‣ Do not connect the cable shield of the display cable to PE (terminal strip of device)!
‣ Run the signal/display cable in the control cabinet separately from live (currentcarrying) cables.

Endress+Hauser

35

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.3

Connecting the sensors

6.3.1

Sensor types for non-hazardous area

Sensors with Memosens protocol
Sensor types

Sensor cable

Sensors

Digital sensors without
additional internal power
supplyWith plug-in
connection andinductive signaltransmission• pH sensors• ORP sensors• Combined sensors• Oxygen sensors (amperometric and optical)• Conductivity sensors with conductive measurement ofconductivity• Chlorine sensors (disinfection)

Fixed cable

Conductivity sensors with inductive measurement ofconductivity

Fixed cable• Process spectrometer• Turbidity sensors• Sensors for interface measurement• Sensors for measuring the spectral absorption
coefficient (SAC)• Nitrate sensors• Optical oxygen sensors• Ion-sensitive sensors

Digital sensors withadditional internal power
supplyThe following rule applies if connecting CUS71D sensors:• The maximum number of Memosens inputs is limited to two.
• Any combination of CUS71D or other sensors is possible.

6.3.2

Sensor types for hazardous area

Sensors with Memosens protocol
Sensor types

Sensor cable

Sensors

Digital sensors without
additional internal power
supplyWith plug-in connection
and inductive signaltransmission• pH sensors• ORP sensors• Combined sensors• Oxygen sensors (amperometric and optical)• Conductivity sensors with conductive
measurement of conductivity• Chlorine sensors (disinfection)

Fixed cable

Conductivity sensors with inductive measurementof conductivity

Intrinsically safe sensors for use in explosive atmospheres may only be connected tothe sensor communication module type 2DS Ex-i. Only the sensors covered by thecertificates may be connected (see XA).
The sensor connections for non-Ex sensors on the base module are disabled.

36

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

6.3.3

Mounting the terminal strip for sensor communication
module 2DS Ex i

2.

1.

A0045451

1.

Fit the cable duct with the central bore over the thread of the sensor communication
module 2DS Ex-i.

2.

Tighten the cable duct.

3.

Establish the grounding of the cable duct (e.g. via the cable duct of the base module).
Use the green/yellow cable supplied for this purpose.

6.3.4

Connecting the functional ground (cabinet device)

GN/YE

You must always connect the terminal strip with PE from the central node in the cabinet.
Use the conductor with cable clamp that is included with the Memosens cable to connect
the functional earth to the terminal strip of the device.

 42

Functional earth connection

You must only ever connect one functional earth to each screw in the terminal strip.
Otherwise, shielding is not guaranteed.

6.3.5

Connecting sensors for non-hazardous area

Types of connection• Direct connection of the sensor cable to the terminal connector of the , 2DS Memosens
module , basic module-E (→  43 ff.)(Memosens sensors only)• Optional for Memosens sensors: Sensor cable plug connected to the M12 sensor socketon the underside of the device (field device)
With this type of connection, the device is already wired at the factory (→  47).

Endress+Hauser

37

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

1.

Sensor cable connected directly
Connect the sensor cable to the terminal connector of the SEM, or the 2DS, or of theBASE2-E module.

2.

If connected via M12 connector (Memosens sensors only)
Connect the sensor connector to an M12 sensor socket which has been previously
installed or is supplied on delivery.

PK

BN
WH
GN
YE

GY

98 97 88 87

98 97 88 87

86 85 86 85

86 85 86 85

Sensor cable connected directly

SensorGN
YE

Sensor
A0039629

 43

Memosens sensors without additional supply
voltage

A0039622

 44

Memosens sensors with additional supply
voltage

85

GY

OG
YE

86

2

85

1

PK

86

2DS

98 97 88 87

SensorSensorSensor 1

WH
BU

GN
YE

98 97 88 87

Sensor 2

BN
WH
GN
YE

Sensor

A0041609

A0033206

 45

Sensors with and without additional supply
voltage at sensor module 2DS 46Spectrometer connection to SEM module

In the case of a single-cannel device:
The left-hand Memosens input on basic module must be used!

38

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

Device versions with a pre-installed
M12 socket are ready-wired upondelivery.

PK
GY

1

2

85

86

1

85

Memosens connection via M12 connection (field device only)
Only for connection in non-hazardous area.

Version without a pre-installed M12
socket

7

NC

86

2

3
4

98 97 88 87

6
5

Sensor 1

1.

Insert an M12 socket(accessory) into a suitableopening in the base of the
housing.

2.

Connect the cable to a
Memosens terminal as per thewiring diagram.

BN
WH
GN
YE

2

1
7

3

NC
6

4

Connecting the sensor

5‣ Connect the sensor cable
A0018021

 48

1

1
2
A00180193
 47 M12 connection (e.g. on
4sensor module)
5
1
Sensor cable with M12 connector 6
7,
NC

connector (→  47item 1)
directly to M12 socket.

M12 assignment, top:socket, bottom: connector Please note the following:(top view in each case)• The internal device wiring is always
the same regardless of what kind ofPK (24 V)
sensor you connect to the M12
GY (Ground 24 V)
socket (plug&play).
BN (3 V)•The signal or power supply cables
WH (Ground 3 V)
are assigned in the sensor head in
GN (Memosens)such a way that the PK and GY
YE (Memosens)
power supply cables are either used
Not connected(e.g. optical sensors) or not (e.g. pH
or ORP sensors).

When connecting intrinsically safe sensors to transmitters with sensor
communication module type 2DS Ex i, the M12 plug-in connector is not permitted.

6.3.6

Connecting intrinsically safe sensors to sensor communication
module type 2DS Ex i

Sensor cable connected directly‣ Connect the sensor cable to the terminal connector of the sensor communication
module 2DS Ex-i.

Endress+Hauser

39

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

98i97i88i87i

BN
WH
GN
YE

98i97i88i87i

2DS
Ex-i

BN
WH
GN
YE

SensorSensor

A0045659

 49

Sensors without additional supply voltage at sensor communication module type 2DS Ex-i

Intrinsically safe sensors for use in explosive atmospheres may only be connected tothe sensor communication module type 2DS Ex-i. Only the sensors covered by thecertificates may be connected (see XA).

6.4

Connecting additional inputs, outputs or relays

LWARNING
Module not covered
No shock protection. Danger of electric shock!
‣ Change or extend the hardware for the non-hazardous area: always fill the slots fromleft to right. Do not leave any gaps.
‣ If all of the slots are not occupied in the case of devices for the non-hazardous area:
always insert a dummy cover or end cover in the slot to the right of the lastmodule(→  2,  10). This ensures that the unit is shock-protected.
‣ Always ensure shock protection is guaranteed particularly in the case of relay modules(2R, 4R, AOR).
‣ Hardware for the hazardous area may not be modified. Only the Manufacturer'sService Team may convert a certified device to another certified device version. This
includes all modules of the transmitter with an integrated 2DS Ex-i module, as well aschanges that concern non-intrinsically safe modules.
The terminal strip (cabinet unit) is used to connect the cable shields.

‣ If additional shields are required, connect them with PE centrally in the control cabinet
via terminal blocks supplied by the customer.

40

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

6.4.1

Digital inputs and outputs

DIO module

47
48

+ 1
–

47 +
48

2

–

45 +
1
46 –
45 +
46 – 2
91 +

1
–
91 +
2
92
–
92

 50

Module

6.4.2

 51

WiringdiagramCurrent inputs

23
1

24 23

24

2

+

–

23+
–

24 23

24

0/4 ... 20 mA

2AI module 52

Endress+Hauser

Module 53

Wiringdiagram41

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.4.3

Current outputs

2AO

4AO

32

–

31+
32

31

+1

0/4 ... 20 mA

0/4 ... 20 mA

31

2

–

32

31 +
32

0/4 ... 20 mA

31

 54

Module

6.4.4

 55

Wiringdiagram 56

Module

 57

+1
–

32

–
+3
–

31 +
32

2

4

–

WiringdiagramRelay

2R module

4R module

41

Relay 142
43
41

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

41

42
43

42
43
41
42
43

Relay 4

Relay 3

41

 58

42

Module 59

Wiringdiagram 60

Module

 61

42
43
41
42
43
WiringdiagramEndress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

Example: Connecting the cleaning unit 71072583 for CAS40D
NOTICEPower consumption too high for the Liquiline alarm relay!
Can cause irreparable damage to the base module‣ Connect the cleaning unit only to terminals of an additional module (AOR, 2R or 4R),
not to the alarm relay of the base module.
T2.0A
PE

L1 N

1

PE

Liquiline/Sampler/
Analyzer:
AOR/2R/4R
41
42
43
230 V AC / 50 Hz
A0028597

 62

Connecting the cleaning unit for CAS40D

Example: Connecting the Chemoclean CYR10B injector cleaning unit

1

L N PE

Relay 2

Relay 1

CM44x/CM44xR/
CM44P
41
42

CYR10B
1
2
1
2

43
41

2

42
43

5
3
4
A0028598

 63
1
2
3
4
5

Endress+Hauser

Connecting the CYR10B injector cleaning unit

External power supply
Cleaner to spray headContainer with cleaner
Motive water 2 to 12 bar (30 to 180 psi)
Backflow valve (to be provided by the customer)

43Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

Connecting PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RS 485

6.5.1

Module 485DP

DIP switchon

T COM SF BF

PWR

6.5

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128/SW
Service

Termi- DGND
nation
VP

82

96

96'

81

DP

95

95'
99'

99

A0050400
A0050399

 64

 65

ModuleWiringdiagram

Terminal

PROFIBUS DP

95

A

96

B

99

Not connected

82

DGND

81

VP

LEDs on front of module
LED

Designation

Color

Description

PWR

Power

GN

Supply voltage is applied and module is initialized.

BF

Bus failure

RD

Bus failure

SF

System failureRD

Device error

COM

Communication

YE

PROFIBUS message sent or received.

T

Bus termination

YE• Off = No termination• On = Termination is used

DIP switches on front of module
DIP

Factory setting

Assignment

1-128

ON

Bus address (→ "Commissioning/communication")OFF

Write protection: "ON" = configuration not possible via the bus, only via local
operationOFF

The switch has no function

Service44

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

Module 485 MBon

DIP switch

T COM SF BF

PWR

6.5.2

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128/SW
Service
82

96

96'

MB/RS485

Termi- DGND
nation
VP

95

81

MB/
RS485

95'

99

99'
A0050402

A0050401

 66

 67

ModuleWiringdiagram

Terminal

Modbus RS485

95

B

96

A

99

C

82

DGND

81

VP

LEDs on front of module
LED

Designation

Color

Description

PWR

Power

GN

Supply voltage is applied and module is initialized.

BF

Bus failure

RD

Bus failure

SF

System failureRD

Device error

COM

Communication

YE

Modbus message sent or received.

T

Bus termination

YE• Off = No termination• On = Termination is used

DIP switches on front of module
DIP

Factory setting

Assignment

1-128

ON

Bus address (→ "Commissioning/communication")OFF

Write protection: "ON" = configuration not possible via the bus, only via local
operationOFF

The switch has no function

ServiceEndress+Hauser

45

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.5.3

Connection via M12 plug (field device only)

PROFIBUS DP
M12 Y-section

Wiring in M12 Y section

P0V
P5V

82
81

Pin assignment in plug andsocket

1

4

2
1

P2 3
RD
GN

96
95
99

3

4
5

2

2

1

4
 70

5

P1

3
5

1

1

2

2

J1 3

3 P1

4

4

5

5

1
2
3
4
5
*

Plug (left) and socket(right)

P5V, 5 V power supply forexternal terminating resistor
A
P0V, reference potential forP5V
Bn.c., not connected
Screen

P2 J1
 68

M12 plug-in connector

 69

WiringWhen using the M12 Y-section, the maximum data transfer rate is limited to
1.5 MBit/s. For direct wiring, the maximum data transfer rate is 12 MBit/s.
Modbus RS485
M12 Y-section

Wiring in M12 Y section

P0V
P5V

82
81

Pin assignment in plug andsocket

1

4
1

P2 3
96
95
99

GN
RD

3

4
5

2

2

1

4
 73

5

P1

3
5

2

1

1

2

2

J1 3

3 P1

4

4

5

5

1
2
3
4
5
*

Plug (left) and socket(right)

P5V, 5 V power supply forexternal terminating resistor
A
P0V, reference potential forP5V
Bn.c., not connected
Screen

P2 J1
 71

46

M12 plug-in connector

 72

WiringEndress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

Ethernet, web server, PROFINETInternal connection

Pin assignment in plug and socket

2
3

2
1

4
 75
1
2
3
4

 74

Endress+Hauser

3

14Plug (left) and socket (right)

Tx+
Rx+
TxRxShielding (thread)

Ethernet socket

47

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.5.4

Bus termination

There are 2 ways to terminate the bus:
1. Internal termination (via DIP switch on module board)

"OFF"
"ON"

 76

DIP switch for internal termination‣ Using a suitable tool such as a tweezer, move all four DIP switches to the "ON" position.
 The internal termination is used.

VP

390 W
B/B'

 77

390 W

220 W

DGND

A/A'

Structure of internal termination

2. External termination
Leave the DIP switches on the module board in the "OFF" position (factory setting).

‣ Connect the external termination to terminals 81 and 82 on the front of module
485DP or 485MB for 5-V power supply.
 The external termination is used.

6.6

Hardware settings

Setting the bus address
1.

Open the housing.

2.

Set the desired bus address via the DIP switches of module 485DP or 485MB.
For PROFIBUS DP, valid bus addresses are anything between 1 and 126, and anything
between 1 and 247 for Modbus. If you configure an invalid address, software
addressing is automatically enabled via the local configuration or via the fieldbus.

48

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Electrical connection

on offon off
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

A0026776

 78

on off
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

Valid PROFIBUS address 67

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

A0026777

 79

Valid Modbus address 195

A0026778

 80

Invalid address 255 1)

1) Order configuration, software addressing is active, software address configured at the factory: PROFIBUS 126,

Modbus 247

6.7

Ensuring the degree of protection

Only the mechanical and electrical connections which are described in these instructions
and which are necessary for the required, designated use, may be carried out on the device
delivered.

‣ Exercise care when carrying out the work.
Individual types of protection permitted for this product (impermeability (IP), electricalsafety, EMC interference immunity, Ex protection) can no longer be guaranteed if, forexample :• Covers are left off• Different power units to the ones supplied are used
• Cable glands are not sufficiently tightened (must be tightened with 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft) forthe permitted level of IP protection)• Unsuitable cable diameters are used for the cable glands• Modules are not fully secured• The display is not fully secured (risk of moisture entering due to inadequate sealing)• Loose or insufficiently tightened cables/cable ends
• Conductive cable strands are left in the device

Endress+Hauser

49

Electrical connection

Liquiline CM44P

6.8

Post-connection check

LWARNING
Connection errors
The safety of people and of the measuring point is at risk! The manufacturer does not
accept any responsibility for errors that result from failure to comply with the instructionsin this manual.
‣ Put the device into operation only if you can answer yes to all the following questions.
Device condition and specifications‣ Are the device and all the cables free from damage on the outside?
Electrical connection‣ Are the mounted cables strain relieved?
‣ Are the cables routed without loops and cross-overs?
‣ Are the signal cables correctly connected as per the wiring diagram?
‣ Have all the other connections been established correctly?
‣ Are unused connection wires connected to the protective ground connection?
‣ Are all plug-in terminals securely engaged?
‣ Are all the connection wires securely positioned in the cable terminals?
‣ Are all cable entries mounted, tightened and leak-tight?
‣ Does the supply voltage match the voltage indicated on the nameplate?

50

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

System integration

7

System integration

7.1

Web server
Versions without fieldbus: An activation code is required for the web server.

7.1.1
Connection‣ Connect the communication cable of the computer to the Ethernet port of the BASE2
module.

Base2

Web Browser

A0039619

 81

Web server/Ethernet connection

7.1.2

Establishing the data connection

All versions with the exception of PROFINET:
To ensure that your device has a valid IP address, you must disable the DHCP parameter inthe Ethernet settings. (Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Ethernet/
Settings)
You can assign the IP address manually in the same menu (for point-to-pointconnections).
All versions including PROFINET:
You will find the IP address and subnet mask of the device under: DIAG/System
information/Ethernet.
1.

Start your PC.

2.

First, configure a manual IP address in the network connection settings of theoperating system.

Example: Microsoft Windows 10

Endress+Hauser

3.

Open Network and Sharing Center.
 Apart from your standard network, you should see an additional Ethernet
connection (e.g. as an "unidentified network").

4.

Select the link to this Ethernet connection.

5.

In the pop-up window select the "Properties" button.

6.

Double-click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)".

7.

Select "Use the following IP Address".

8.

Enter the desired IP address. This address must be in the same subnet as the IP
address of the device, e.g.:
 IP address for Liquiline: 192.168.1.212 (as configured previously)
IP address for PC: 192.168.1.213.

9.

Start the Internet browser.
51

System integration

Liquiline CM44P

10. If you use a proxy server to connect to the Internet:
Disable the proxy (browser settings under "Connections/LAN settings").
11. Enter the IP address of your device in the address bar (192.168.1.212 in theexample).
 The system takes a few moments to establish the connection and then the CM44
web server starts. You might be asked for a password. The factory setting is"admin" for the user name and "admin" for the password.
12. Enter the following address(es) to download logbooks:
 192.168.1.212/logbooks_csv.fhtml (for logbooks in CSV format)
192.168.1.212/logbooks_fdm.fhtml (for logbooks in FDM format)
Downloads in FDM format can be securely transmitted, saved and visualized withEndress+Hauser's "Field Data Manager Software".
(→ www.endress.com/ms20)

7.1.3

Operation

The menu structure of the web server corresponds to the onsite operation.

A0026780

 82

Example of web server (menu/language=English)• Clicking a menu name or a function corresponds to pressing the navigator.
• You can make your settings conveniently via the computer keyboard.
Instead of using an Internet browser, you can also use FieldCare for configuration via
Ethernet. The Ethernet DTM required for this is an integral part of the "Endress+Hauser Interface Device DTM Library".
Download: https://portal.endress.com/webdownload/FieldCareDownloadGUI/

7.2

Service interface

You can connect the device to a computer via the service interface and configure it using"FieldCare" . Furthermore, configurations can also be saved, transferred and documented.

7.2.1

52

Connection

1.

Connect the service connector to the interface on the Liquiline base module andconnect it to the Commubox.

2.

Connect the Commubox via the USB connection to the computer on which FieldCareis installed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

System integration

FieldCare
Service

FXA291

A0039618

 83

Connection overview

7.2.2

Establishing the data connection

1.

Start FieldCare.

2.

Establish a connection to the Commubox. To do so, select the "CDI Communication
FXA291" ComDTM.

3.

Then select the "Liquiline CM44x" DTM and start configuration.

You can now start online configuration via the DTM.
Online configuration competes with onsite operation, i.e. each of the two options blocks
the other one. On both sides it is possible to take away access from the other side.

7.2.3

Operation• In the DTM the menu structure corresponds to the onsite operation. The functions of theLiquiline soft keys are found in the main window on the left.
• Clicking a menu name or a function corresponds to pressing the navigator.
• You can make your settings conveniently via the computer keyboard.
• You can use FieldCare to save logbooks, make backups of configurations and transfer
configurations to other devices.
• You can also print out configurations or save them as PDFs.

7.3

Fieldbus systems

7.3.1

HART

You can communicate using the HART protocol via current output 1.
1.

Connect the HART modem or HART handheld terminal to current output 1(communication load 250 ‐ 500 Ohm).

2.

Establish a connection via your HART device.

3.

Operate the Liquiline via the HART device. To do so, follow the instructions in the
manual.
More detailed information on HART communication is provided on the product pages
on the Internet (→ BA00486C).

7.3.2

PROFIBUS DP

Communication via PROFIBUS DP is possible with module 485DP and the appropriate
device version.

‣ Connect the PROFIBUS data cable to the terminals of the fieldbus module as described .
For detailed information on "PROFIBUS communication", see the product pages on theInternet (→ SD01188C).
Endress+Hauser

53

System integration

Liquiline CM44P

7.3.3

ModbusCommunication via Modbus RS485 is possible with module 485MB and the appropriate
device version.
Communication via Modbus TCP is possible with module BASE2.
The RTU and ASCII protocols are available when connecting via Modbus RS485. You canswitch to ASCII on the device.

‣ Connect the Modbus data cable to the terminals of module 485MB (RS 485) or to the
RJ45 socket of module BASE2 (TCP) as described.

For detailed information on "Modbus communication", see the product pages on theInternet (→ SD01189C).

7.3.4

EtherNet/IP

Communication via EtherNet/IP is possible with module BASE2 and the appropriate device
version.

‣ Connect the EtherNet/IP data cable to the RJ45 socket of module BASE2.
For detailed information on "Ethernet/IP communication", see the product pages on
the Internet (→ SD01293C).

7.3.5

PROFINET

Communication via PROFINET is possible with module BASE2 and the appropriate device
version.

‣ Connect the PROFINET data cable to the RJ45 socket of module BASE2.
For detailed information on "PROFINET communication", see the product pages on theinternet (→ SD02490C).

54

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation options

8

Operation options

8.1

Overview

8.1.1

Display and operating elements

1

3

2
A0011764

 84
1
2
3

Overview of operation (using the example of the field device)

Display (with red display background in alarm condition)
Navigator (jog/shuttle and press/hold function)
Soft keys (function depends on menu)

8.1.2
1

4

Display2

1

Menu path and/or device designation

2

Status display

3

Help if available

4

Assignment of the soft keys

3
A0037692

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Liquiline CM44P

8.2

Access to operating menu via local display

8.2.1

Operating concept‣ Pressing the soft key: selecting the menu directly‣ Turning the navigator: moving the cursor in themenu

Menu/Language

English!"Čeština
NederlandsFrançais
DeutschItaliano#$%
Polski‣ Pressing the navigator: launching a function‣ Turning the navigator: selecting a value (e.g. froma list)Menu/Language

English!"Čeština
NederlandsFrançais
DeutschItaliano#$%
Polski‣ Pressing the navigator: accepting the new value

8.2.2

 New setting is accepted

Locking or unlocking operating keys

Locking operating keys
1.

56

Press the navigator for longer than 2 s.
 A context menu for locking the operating keys is displayed.
You have the choice of locking the keys with or without password protection.
"With password" means that you can only unlock the keys again by entering thecorrect password. Set this password here: Menu/Setup/General settings/
Extended setup/Data management/Change key lock password.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation options

2.

Select whether to lock keys with or without a password.
 The keys are locked. No more entries can be made. In the soft key bar, you will
see the symbol.
The password is 0000 when the device is delivered from the factory. Make sure tonote down any changes to the password, as otherwise you will not be able to unlock
the keypad yourself.

Unlocking operating keys
1.

Press the navigator for longer than 2 s.
 A context menu for unlocking the operating keys is displayed.

2.

Key unlock .
 The keys are unlocked immediately if you did not choose to lock with a password.
Otherwise you are asked to enter your password.

3.

Only if keypad is password-protected: enter the right password.
 The keys are unlocked. It is possible to access the entire onsite operation again.
The symbol is no longer visible on the display.

8.3

Configuration options

8.3.1

Display only

• You can only read the values but cannot change them.
• Typical read-only values are: sensor data and system information

8.3.2

Picklists• You receive a list of options. In a few cases, these also appear in the form of multiple
choice boxes.
• Usually you just select one option; in rare instances you select one or more options.

8.3.3

Numerical values• You are changing a variable.
• The maximum and minimum values for this variable are shown on the display.
• Configure a value within these limits.

8.3.4

Actions• You trigger an action with the appropriate function.
• You know that the item in question is an action if it is preceded by the following symbol:• Examples of typical actions include:• Deleting log entries• Saving or loading configurations• Triggering cleaning programs• Example: Diagnostics/Logbooks/Configuration logbook/Delete all entries

Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Liquiline CM44P

8.3.5

User-defined text

• You are assigning an individual designation.
• Enter a text. You can use the characters in the editor for this purpose (upper-case andlower-case letters, numbers and special characters).
• Using the soft keys, you can:• Cancel your entries without saving the data ()• Delete the character in front of the cursor ( )• Move the cursor back one position ( )• Finish your entries and save ()• Example: Menu/Setup/General settings/Device tag

8.3.6

Tables• Tables are needed to map mathematical functions or to enter irregular interval samples.
• You edit a table by navigating through rows and columns with the navigator andchanging the values of the cells.
• You only edit the numerical values. The controller automatically takes care of theengineering units.
• You can add rows to the table (INSERT soft key) or delete them (DEL soft key).
• Afterwards, you save the table (SAVE soft key).
• You can also cancel your entries any time using the  soft key.
• Example: Menu/Setup/Inputs/pH/Medium comp.

58

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Commissioning

9

Commissioning

9.1

Function check

LWARNING
Incorrect connection, incorrect supply voltage
Safety risks for staff and device malfunctions!
‣ Check that all connections have been established correctly in accordance with thewiring diagram.
‣ Ensure that the supply voltage matches the voltage indicated on the nameplate.
Saving the configuration settings as a screenshot
Via the local display , you can take screenshots at any time and save them to an SD card.
1.

Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the base module.

2.

Press the navigator button for at least 3 seconds.

3.

In the context menu, select the Screenshot item.
 The current screen is saved as a bitmap file to the SD card in the "Screenshots"
folder.

9.2

Power-up

During the device startup phase, the relays and current outputs have an undefined
status for a few seconds prior to initialization. Watch out for possible effects on any
actuators which may be connected.

9.2.1

Setting the operating language

Configuring the language
If you have not already done so, close the housing cover and screw the device closed.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Switch on the supply voltage.
 Wait for the initialization to finish.

2.

Press the soft key: MENU.

3.

Set your language in the top menu item.
 The device can now be operated in your chosen language.

59

Commissioning

Liquiline CM44P

9.2.2

Display behavior

Menu/Operation/Display
Function

Options

Info

Contrast

5 to 95 %Adjust the screen settings to suit your working
environment.

Factory setting
50 %Backlight

Selection
• On
• Off
• Automatic

Screen rotation

Backlight = Automatic
The backlighting is switched off automaticallyafter a short time if a button is not pressed. It
switches back on again as soon as you press thenavigator button.

Factory setting
Automatic

Backlight = On
The backlighting does not switch off
automatically.

Selection• Manual• Automatic

If Automatic is selected, the single‐channel
measured value display switches from one
channel to the next every second.

Factory setting
Manual9.3

User definable screens

Menu/Operation/User definable screens
Function

Options

Meas. screen 1 ... 6

Meas. screen

Info
You can create 6 measuring screens of your own
and give them a name. The functions are
identical for all 6 measuring screens.

Selection
• On
• Off

Once you have defined your own measuring
screen, you can switch it on here. You can findthe new screen under User definable screens.

Factory setting
Off
Label

Customized text, 20
characters

Name of the measuring screen
Appears in the status bar of the display.

Number of lines

1 to 8Specify the number of measured values
displayed.

Factory setting
8Line 1 ... 8
Source of data

User interface
Label

Specify the content of Label in the submenu ofeach line.

Selection• None• See list in "Info" column‣ Select a source of data.

Factory setting
None

Measured value
Source of data is an
input

60

Selection
Depends on the input
Factory settingNone

You can choose from the following:• Sensor inputs• Heartbeat diagnostics of sensor inputs• Controller• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Mathematical functions• Binary inputs and outputs• Current outputs• Relay• Measuring range switching
You can display different main, secondary andraw measured values depending on the type of
input.
No options can be selected for outputs here.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Commissioning

Menu/Operation/User definable screens
Function
Actuator type
Source of data is acontroller

Options

Info

Selection• None• Bipolar• Unipolar• Unipolar+

For more information on controllers andmanipulated variables: →  86.

Factory setting
None
Label
Set label to "%0V" 1)

1)

Customized text, 20
characters

User-defined name for the parameter to be
displayed

ActionIf you perform this action you accept theparameter name that is automatically suggested.
Your own parameter name (Label) is lost!

"%0V" here stands for text that depends on the context. This text is generated automatically by thesoftware and inserted in place of %0V. In the simplest situations, the generated text could be the name of
the measuring channel, for example.

9.4

Basic setup

Making basic settings
1.

Switch to the Setup/Basic setup menu.
 Make the following settings.

2.

Device tag: Give your device any name of your choice (max. 32 characters).

3.

Set date: Correct the set date if necessary.

4.

Set time: Correct the set time if necessary.
 For quick commissioning, you can ignore the additional settings for outputs,
relays etc. You can make these settings later in the specific menus.

5.

To return to the measuring mode: press the soft key for ESC for at least one second.
 Your controller now works with your basic settings. The sensors connected use
the factory settings of the sensor type in question and the individual calibration
settings that were last saved.

If you wish to configure your most important input and output parameters in the Basic
setup :‣ Configure the current outputs, relays, limit switches, controllers, device diagnostics andcleaning cycles with the submenus which follow the time setting.

Endress+Hauser

61

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10

Operation

10.1

Display

10.1.1

Soft keys in measuring mode

On the bottom row of the display you can find four soft keys in the measuring screens:• With MENU, CAL and DIAG take you directly to the specific software menu.
• With HOLD you can activate an immediate, general hold for sensors. This also sets all
the linked outputs, controllers and cleaning cycles to HOLD. Any sensor cleaning
programs that are currently running are interrupted. However, you can also start manual
sensor cleaning when a hold is active.

10.1.2

Measuring mode

There are different display modes: (press the navigator button to change the mode)• (1) Overview of all the inputs and outputs• (2) Main measured value of an input or output or the status of a relay• (3) Main and secondary measured value of a sensor input• (4) All measured values of a sensor input• (5) Only for spectrometer measured value:
Graphic display of the absorption spectrum• (5) Only for interface measurement:
Graphic display of the separation zone
There are also submenus:• (6) User-definable measuring menus (only available if already defined)
Selection of previously configured screens (→  60)• (7) Heartbeat diagnostics
Quick overview of the health of the device and of each connected sensor that supports
Heartbeat technology
Change of channel to modes (2) - (5)‣ Turn the navigator.
 The display changes from channel to channel.

62

Sensor type

Main value

Main/secondary
measured value

All values

Spectrometer

L*

L*
Temperature

L*, a*, b*, temperature
Graphic display of spectrum

pH, glass

pH value

pH value, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature, Glass impedance

Combined sensor pH
and ORPpH value or ORP orrH value

pH value or ORP or rH
value, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature, Glass impedance

pH, ISFET

pH value

pH value, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

ORP

ORP

ORP, temperature

Main value, Raw value, Offset,
Temperature

Conductivity,
measured inductively

Conductivity,
concentration

Conductivity,
concentration,
temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Conductivity,
Conductivity,
measured conductively resistivity,
concentration

Conductivity, resistivity,
concentration,
temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Oxygen, optical andamperometric

Oxygen, temperaturePartial pressure, Saturation ,Concentration, Temperature

OxygenEndress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Sensor type

Main value

Main/secondary
measured value

All values

Disinfection

Chlorine orchlorine dioxide(depending on thesensor)Chlorine or chlorine
dioxide, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

NitrateNitrateNitrate, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Turbidity

Turbidity

Turbidity, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Spectral absorption
coefficient (SAC)

SAC

SAC, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Sludge level

Turbidity

Turbidity, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Ammonium, ionselective

AmmoniumAmmonium,temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Nitrate, ion-selective

NitrateNitrate, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Potassium, ionselective

Potassium

Potassium, temperature

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature

Interfacemeasurement

UIS

UIS

Main value, Raw value,
Temperature
Separation zone (graphic)

Heartbeat diagnostics(Optional or with additional activation code)• Heartbeat diagnostics screen with graphic indicators for the health of the device andsensor and with a maintenance or (sensor-dependent) calibration timer• Heartbeat status information on the health of the device and condition of the sensor→  64• : Sensor/device condition and maintenance timer > 20 %; no action is required• : Sensor/device condition or maintenance timer > 5 ≤ 20 %, maintenance not yet
urgent but should be scheduled• : Sensor/device condition or maintenance timer < 5 %, maintenance isrecommended• The Heartbeat sensor condition is the assessment of the calibration results and thesensor diagnostic functions.
An unhappy smiley can be due to the calibration result, the measured value status or tothe operating hours limit having been exceeded. These limits can be configured in thesensor setup in a way that adapts the Heartbeat diagnostics to the application.
Heartbeat and NAMUR category
The Heartbeat status indicates the sensor or device condition while the NAMUR categories(F, C, M, S) assess the reliability of the measured value. The two conditions can correlate
but do not have to.
• Example 1• The number of remaining cleaning cycles for the sensor reaches 20% of the defined
maximum number. The Heartbeat symbol changes fromto . The measured value
is still reliable so the NAMUR status signal does not change.
• If the maximum number of cleaning cycles is exceeded, the Heartbeat symbol changes
from to . While the measured value can still be reliable, the NAMUR status signal
changes to M (maintenance required).
• Example 2
The sensor breaks. The Heartbeat status changes immediately fromto and the
NAMUR status signal also changes immediately to F (failure).

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10.1.3

Device status

Icons on the display alert you to special device states.
Icon

Location

Description

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Failure"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Maintenance request"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Check"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Out of specification"

Header bar

Fieldbus or TCP/IP communication active

Header bar

Hold active (for sensors)

At measured value
At measured value

1)

Hold for the actuator (current output, limit switch etc.) is active
1)

An offset has been added to the measured value

At measured value

Measured value in "Bad" or "Alarm" state

At measured value

Automatic temperature compensation active (for sensors)

At measured value

Manual temperature compensation active (for sensors)

Header bar

Simulation mode active or Memocheck SIM connected

At measured value

The measured value is influenced by a simulated value

At measured value

The displayed measured value is simulated (for sensors)

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is good

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is bad

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is OK

Header bar

Controller is active

Only pH or ORP measurement

If two or more diagnostic messages occur simultaneously, only the icon for themessage with the highest priority is shown on the display (for the order of priority
according to NAMUR, →  136).

10.1.4

Assignment views

Assignment views, e.g. Channel assignment view, appear as the last function in many
sections of the menu. You can use this function to see which actuators or functions areconnected to an input or output. The assignments appear in hierarchical order.

10.2

General settings

10.2.1

Basic settings

Menu/Setup/General settings
Function

Options

Info

Device tag

Customized text, 32
characters‣ Select any name for your controller, e.g. use

Temperature unit

the TAG name.

Selection
• °C
• °F
• K
Factory setting°C

64

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings
Function

Options

Info

Current output range

Selection• 0..20 mA• 4..20 mA

In accordance with NAMUR NE43, the linear
range is 3.8 to 20.5 mA (4..20 mA) or 0 to 20.5
mA (0..20 mA). If the range is exceeded orundershot, the current value stops at the range
limit and a diagnostic message (460 or 461) is
output.

Factory setting
4..20 mA
Failure current

0.0 to 23.0 mA

The function meets NAMUR NE43.

Factory setting
22.5 mA‣ Set the current value that should be output
at the current outputs in the event of anerror.

The value for Failure current should be outside the measuring range. If you have selected Current
 output
range = 0..20 mA, you should set a fault current between 20.1 and 23 mA. If Current output
range = 4..20 mA is selected, you could also define a value of < 4 mA as a fault current.
The device allows a fault current within the measuring range. In such instances, pay attention to any
effects this may have on your process.
Alarm delay

Device hold0 to 9999 s
Factory setting
0s

The software displays only the errors that arepresent longer than the set delay time. This
makes it possible to suppress messages that only
occur briefly and are caused by normal processspecific fluctuations.

Selection• Disabled• Enabled

You can enable an immediate, general hold (forsensors) here. The function acts in the same way
as the HOLD softkey in the measuring screens.

Factory setting
Disabled

10.2.2

Date and time

Menu/Setup/General settings/Date/Time

Endress+Hauser

Function

Options

Info

Set date

Depends on the format

Editing mode:Day (two-digit): 01 to 31
Month (two-digit): 01 to 12
Year (four-digit): 1970 to 2106

Set time

Depends on the format

Editing mode:hh (hour): 00 to 23 / 0 am to 12 pm
mm (minutes): 00 to 59
ss (seconds): 00 to 59

65

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/General settings/Date/Time
Function

Options

Info

Selection• DD.MM.YYYY• YYYY-MM-DD• MM-DD-YYYY‣ Select a date format.

Extended setup
Date format

Factory setting
DD.MM.YYYYTime format

Selection• hh:mm am (12h)• hh:mm (24h)• hh:mm:ss (24h)‣ Choose between 12-hour display or 24-hour
display. Seconds can also be displayed withthe latter version.

Factory setting
hh:mm:ss (24h)Time zone

Selection• None• Choice of 35 time zones

None = Greenwich Mean Time (London).

Factory setting
None
DST

Selection• Off• Europe• USA• Manual
Factory settingOff

10.2.3The controller adapts the summertime/normal
time changeover automatically if you choose
European or American daylight saving time.
Manual means that you can specify the start andend of daylight saving time yourself. Here, two
additional submenus are displayed in which you
specify the changeover date and time.

Hold settings

Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings
Function

OptionsInfo

0 to 600 s

The hold status is maintained for the duration of
the delay time when you switch to themeasuring mode.

Settings automatic Hold
Hold release time

Factory setting
0s
Setup menu
Diagnostics menu

Selection• Disabled• Enabled‣ Decide whether the device outputs shouldswitch to the defined hold state when theparticular menu is opened.

Factory setting
Disabled
Calibration active

Factory setting
EnabledIf a device-specific hold status is activated, any cleaning previously started isinterrupted. When a hold is active you can only start manual cleaning.

10.2.4

Logbooks

Logbooks record the following events:• Calibration/adjustment events• Operator events• Diagnostic events
You define how the logbooks should store the data.

66

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

In addition, you can also define individual data logbooks .
1.

Assign the logbook name.

2.

Select the measured value to be recorded.

3.

Set the scan time (Scan time).
 You can set the scan time individually for every data logbook.
Further information on the logbooks: →  158.

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function

Options

Info

Logbook ident

Customized text, 16
characters

Part of the file name when exporting a logbook

Event logbook

Selection• Off• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

All diagnostic messages are recorded

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow,i. e.
you cannot store any new values. The controller
displays a corresponding diagnostic message.
The memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive a

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Overflow warnings
Event logbook = Fill up buffer
Calibration logbook
Diagnostic logbook
Configuration logbook

diagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory setting
Off

Data logbooks
New

You can create a maximum of 8 data logbooks.

Logbook name

Customized text, 20
characters

Source of data

Selection• Sensor inputs• Heartbeat signals• Controller• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Binary inputs• Mathematical functions‣ Select a data source for the logbook entries.
You can choose from the following:• Connected sensors• Available controllers• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Binary input signals• Mathematical functions

Factory setting
None
Measured value

Selection
You can record different measured values
Depends on Source of data depending on the data source.
Factory setting
None

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function
Scan time

OptionsInfo

0:00:01 to 1:00:00

Minimum time interval between two entries
Format: H:MM:SS

Factory setting
0:01:00
Data logbook

Overflow warnings
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

Selection• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow,i. e. no
new values can be saved. The controller displays
a corresponding diagnostic message. The
memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive adiagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory settingOff
Add anotherlogbook

ActionOnly if you want to create another data logbook
immediately. You add a new data logbook at alater date using New.

Finished

ActionThis allows you to exit the New menu.

Start/stop
simultaneously

ActionAppears if you have created more than one datalogbook. With one mouse click, you can start orstop recording all the data logbooks.

Logbook name

The name of this submenu is based on the nameof the logbook and only appears once you havecreated a logbook.

 This menu appears several times if you have several data logbooks.
Source of data

Read onlyThis is for information purposes only. If you
want to record another value, delete this logbook
and create a new data logbook.

Read only

Displays the days, hours and minutes remaining
until the logbook is full.

Read only

Displays the number of entries remaining until
the logbook is full.

Logbook name

Customized text, 20
characters

You can change the name here again.

Scan time

0:00:01 to 1:00:00
Factory setting
0:01:00

As above
Minimum time interval between two entries
Format: H:MM:SS

Selection• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow, i. e. no
new values can be saved. The controller displays
a corresponding diagnostic message. The
memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive a

Measured value
Log time left
Event logbook =Fill up buffer
Log size
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

Data logbook

Overflow warnings
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

diagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory settingOff

68

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function

Options

Line plotter
Axes

Info
Menu to define the graphic display

Selection
• Off
• On

Should the axes (x, y) be displayed (On) or not(Off)?

Factory settingOn
Orientation

Selection• Horizontal• Vertical
Factory setting
Horizontal

X-Description
Y-Description
Grids
Pitches

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

X Pitch/Grid distance

10 to 50%

Y Pitch/Grid distance

Factory setting
10 %RemoveActionYou can choose whether the value curves should
be displayed from left to right (Horizontal) orfrom top to bottom (Vertical). If you want todisplay two data logbooks simultaneously, makesure that both logbooks have the same settingshere.

‣ Decide whether a description should be

displayed for the axes and whether gridlines
should be shown. In addition, you can alsodecide whether pitches should be displayed.

‣ Determine the pitch.

This action removes the data logbook. Any datathat have not been saved are lost.

Example: New data logbook (Setup/General settings/Logbooks/Data logbooks/New)
1.

Make the settings:• Logbook name
Assign a name. Example: "01".
• Source of data
Select a data source. Example: Sensor connected to channel 1 (CH1).
• Measured value
Select the measured value to be recorded. Example: pH value.
• Scan time
Specify the time interval between two logbook entries.
• Data logbook
Activate the logbook: specify the data storage method.

Endress+Hauser

2.

../Finished: Perform the action.
 The device shows the new logbook in the list of data logbooks.

3.

Select data logbook "01".
 Additional display: Log time left.

4.

Only in the case of Fill up buffer:
Decide to set Overflow warning: On or Off.
 On: The device displays a diagnostic message in the event of memory overflow.

5.

Line plotter submenu: Specify the type of graphic representation.

69

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10.2.5Extended setup

Diagnostics settings
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

70

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

HART bus address
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/HART
Function

OptionsInfo

Bus address

0 to 63

You can change the device address to integrate
several HART devices in a single network(Multidrop mode).

Factory setting0

If you reset the device to the factory settings (Diagnostics/Reset/Factory default),
the bus address is not reset. Your setting is retained.
PROFIBUS DP
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/PROFIBUS
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Termination

Read only

If the device is the last in the bus, you canterminate via the hardware.
→  48Bus address

1 to 125

If you have addressed the bus via hardware (DIP
switches on the module, →  48), you can only
read the address here.
If an invalid address is set via the hardware, youhave to assign a valid address for your device
either here or via the bus.

Ident number

Selection• Automatic• PA-Profile 3.02 (9760)• Liquiline CM44x (155D)• Manufacturer specific
Factory setting
Automatic

ModbusMenu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Modbus
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Termination

Endress+Hauser

Read only

If the device is the last in the bus, you canterminate via the hardware.
→  4871

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Modbus
Function

Options

Info

Selection
• TCP
• RTU
• ASCII

The transmission mode is displayed dependingon the version ordered.
In the case of RS485 transmission, you canchoose between RTU and ASCII . There are no
choices for Modbus-TCP.

Settings
Transmission mode

Factory setting(Modbus-RS485 only)
RTU
Baudrate
Modbus-RS485 only

Selection• 1200• 2400• 4800• 9600• 19200• 38400• 57600• 115200
Factory setting
19200

ParityModbus-RS485 only

Selection• Even (1 Stopbit)• Odd (1 Stopbit)• None (2 Stopbit)
Factory setting
Even (1 Stopbit)

Byte order

Selection• 1-0-3-2• 0-1-2-3• 2-3-0-1• 3-2-1-0
Factory setting
1-0-3-2

Watchdog

0 to 999 s
Factory setting
5s

If no data transmission takes place for longer
than the time set, this is an indicator that
communication has been interrupted. After thistime, input values received via the Modbus are
considered to be invalid.

Web server
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Webserver
Function

Options

Info

Webserver

Selection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory setting
On
Webserver TCP port 80

Read only

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is anarrangement (protocol) as to how data should beexchanged between computers. A port is a partof an address which assigns data segments to a
network protocol.

Webserver login

Selection
• Off
• On

You can switch user administration on and off at
this point. This makes it possible to create
multiple users with password access.

Factory settingOn

72

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Webserver
Function

Options

Info

View/edit

You can change user names or passwords ordelete users. A user is already created at thefactory: "admin" with password "admin".

Name

Free text

Create new user

Enter new user password

Free text

1.

INSERT .

Confirm new user
password

Free text

2.

Assign any name to the new user.

3.

Select a password for the user.

Change user password

Free text

4.

Confirm password.
 You can now change the password at
any time.

User administration
List of users alreadycreatedNew user:PROFINET
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/PROFINET
Function

Options

Info

Name of station

Read only

Symbolic name for unique identification of the
field device in a PROFINET system. The
parameter can only be written via the DCP
protocol.

Factory setting
Empty character string

Ethernet/IP or Ethernet (depending on the protocol)
If PROFINET is used, the settings in this menu are read only settings. The network
settings are made via the PROFINET-DCP protocol.
For detailed information on "PROFINET communication", see the product pages on theinternet (→ SD02490C).

Endress+Hauser

73

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Ethernet
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Settings
Link settings

Selection• Auto negotiation• 10MBps half duplex• 10MBps full duplex• 100MBps half duplex• 100MBps full duplex
Factory setting
Auto negotiation

DHCP

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
On

Transmission methods of the communication
channels• Full duplex:
Data can be transmitted and received
simultaneously.
• Half-duplex:
Data can be transmitted and received on analternating basis only, i.e. not simultaneously.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol(DHCP) makes it possible to assign the network
configuration to clients via a server. With DHCP,
it is possible to automatically integrate thedevice into an existing network without the needfor manual configuration. Normally only theautomatic assignment of the IP address must be
configured at the client. During startup, the IP
address, the netmask and the gateway are
retrieved from a DHCP server.
you want to assign the IP address of the Dodevice manually? If so, you have to set
DHCP = Off.

74

IP-Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

An IP address is an address in computer
networks which are based on the Internet
protocol (IP).
You can only set the IP address if DHCP isswitched off.

Netmaskxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

On the basis of the IP address of a device, thenetmask specifies which IP addresses this device
searches for in its own network and which
addresses it could access in other networks via arouter. It therefore divides the IP address into a
network part (network prefix) and a device part.
The network part must be identical for all
devices in the individual network, and the device
part must be different for every device within the
network.

Gatewayx.x.x.x

A gateway (protocol converter) enables
communication between networks that are
based on completely different protocols.

Service switch

Read only

MAC-Address

Read only

The MAC address (Media Access Control
address) is the hardware address of every
individual network adapter which is used touniquely identify the device in a computer
network.

EtherNetIP Port 44818

Read only

A port is a part of an address which assigns data
segments to a network protocol.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Accepting settings
Have you changed settings manually, such as the IP address?

‣ Before you leave the Ethernet menu:
select SAVE to apply your settings.
 In the DIAG/System information menu you can check whether the new settings
are used.
Data management
Firmware update
Please contact your local sales office for information on firmware updates available
for your controller and its compatibility with earlier versions.
Current firmware version : Menu/Diagnostics/System information.

‣ Back up your current setup and your logbooks to an SD card.
To install a firmware update, you must have the update available on an SD card.
1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/
Firmware update.
 The update files on the SD card are displayed.

3.

Select the desired update and select yes when asked the following:
The current firmware will be overwritten.
After this the device will reboot.
Do you want to proceed?
 The firmware is loaded and the device is then started with the new firmware.

Saving the setup
Saving a setup offers the following advantages, among others :• Copying settings for other devices• Quick and easy switching between various setups, e. g. for different user groups or forrecurring sensor type changes• Restoring a tried-and-tested setup, e. g. if you have changed a lot of settings and nolonger know what the original settings were1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Savesetup .

3.

Name: Assign a file name.

4.

Then select Save .
 If you have already assigned the file name, you will be asked whether you want to
overwrite the existing setup.

5.

Use OK to confirm or cancel and assign a new file name.
 Your setup is stored on the SD card and you can upload it quickly to the device at
a later date.

Loading the setup
When you load a setup, the current configuration is overwritten.
1.

Endress+Hauser

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader. A setup must have been saved to
the SD card.

75

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Loadsetup .
 A list of all the setups on the SD card is displayed.
An error message is displayed if there is no valid setup on the card.

3.

Select the desired setup.
 A warning is displayed:
The current parameters will be overwritten and the device will reboot.
Warning: Please note that cleaning and controller programs can be active.
Do you want to proceed?

4.

Use OK to confirm or cancel.
 If you select OK to confirm, the device restarts with the desired setup.

Exporting the setup
Exporting a setup offers the following advantages, among others:• Export in XML format with a stylesheet for formatted display in an XML-compatible
application, such as . Microsoft Internet Explorer• Importing the data (drag and drop the XML file into a browser window)
1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Export
setup .

3.

Name: Assign a file name.

4.

Then select Export .
 If you have already assigned the file name, you will be asked whether you want to
overwrite the existing setup.

5.

Use OK to confirm or cancel and assign a new file name.
 Your setup is saved on the SD card in the "Device" folder.
You cannot upload the exported setup to the device again. You must use the Save
setup . This is the only way you can save a setup to an SD card and reload it later on or
upload it to other devices.

Activation code
Activation codes are required for:
• Additional functions, e. g. Fieldbus communication• Firmware upgrades• Modifications, e.g. deactivation of fieldbus protocols
If the original device has activation codes, these can be found on the nameplate. The
corresponding device functions are activated at the factory. Codes are only required if
servicing the device or deactivating fieldbus protocols.
1.

Enter the activation code: Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data
management/Activation code.

2.

Confirm your entry.
 The new hardware or software function is activated and can be configured.

Functions that are enabled by an activation code:
Function

Activation code beginning with

Second Memosens input
Fieldbus deactivation when removing module 485DP/485MB
2 current outputs (BASE2-E module only)
Web server

76

2) 3)

062...
1)

0B0...
081...
351...

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Function

Activation code beginning with

HART

0B1...

PROFIBUS DP

0B3...

3)

0B8...

Modbus RS485

0B5...

EtherNet/IP 3)

0B9...

PROFINET

0B7...

Modbus TCP

Measuring range switching, set 1
Measuring range switching, set 2

211...
4)

Feedforward control

220...

Chemoclean Plus
Cation exchanger capacity
Formula212...

25...
5)

6)

301...
321...

Heartbeat monitoring

2D1...

Heartbeat verification

2E1...

1)

2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

If module 485DP/485MB is removed with the fieldbus protocol activated, the device outputs an error
message. Enter the activation code from the inside nameplate. The fieldbus is only deactivated once you do
this. The appropriate activation code must then be entered to activate current outputs of the base module.
Additional current outputs (CM444R and CM448R only) are activated as soon as the corresponding
module is used.
Via Ethernet socket of the BASE2 module, for versions without an Ethernet fieldbus
When you order the "Measuring range switching" option, you receive two activation codes. Enter both inorder to have two sets for measuring range switching.
Mathematical function
Mathematical function

Change password
You can lock the operating keys with a password (access the context menu by pressing thenavigator for longer). The keys can then only be enabled by entering the right password.
You can set the password to lock the keys here: Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended
setup/Data management/Change key lock password.
1.

Enter the current password (factory setting 0000).
 Enter new password

2.

Enter a new password.
 Confirm new password

3.

Enter the new password again.
 The password has been changed successfully.

Press the navigator for longer to return to the measuring mode.

Endress+Hauser

77

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10.3

Inputs

10.3.1

Spectrometer

Basic settings
Spectrometer identification
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

Order code of the connected sensor

Application
Calibration datasets are saved under an individual name in the sensor. A new sensor
is calibrated at the factory and thus already has appropriate datasets. You can add
your own datasets during each calibration. These are then available for selection
under Application type.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer
Function

Options

Application type

Selection
color

Info

Factory setting
color
DatasetPreselection for saved calibration datasets

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type78

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific holdEndress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Extended setup
Temperature format and measurement period
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Spectrometer/Extended setup
Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##‣ For specifying the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Measurement period

Selection• Default• Manual
Factory setting
Default

Measurement period

1.00 to 3600.00 s

Number of measurements

Measurement period = Manual

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs

Factory settingNone(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.
Calibration settings
Stability criteria
You define the permitted variation in the measured value which may not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, thecalibration will not be allowed and is canceled automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
0.50 K
Duration

5 to 100 s
Factory setting
10 s

Endress+Hauser

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Timeframe within which the permitted
measured value variation may not be exceeded

79Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Calibration monitoring
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Calib. expiration time

Function

Options

Info

Warning limit

1 to 51 weeks

Warning and alarm limits mutually influenceeach other's adjustment range. General rule:
Alarm limit > warning limit.
‣ Select warning and alarm limits that matchyour process.

Factory setting
48 weeks
Alarm limit

49 to 104 weeks
Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic settings
Operating hours limit values
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Spectrometer/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours
Function

Options

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Info

Factory setting
Off
Operating time

0 to 60 000 h

Operation < -20 °C

Factory setting
10 000 h

Operation > 60 °C

The total operating time of the process
spectrometer and its use under extreme
conditions is monitored. If the operating timeexceeds the defined threshold values, the device
issues a corresponding diagnostics message.

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.

80

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Status signal

Options

Info

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

SpectrumMenu/Setup/Inputs/Spectrometer/Extended setup/Spectrum
Function

Options

Info

Spectrum

Selection• Intensity• Absorption• Reference

Determines the type of spectrum display andspectrum storage

Factory setting
Absorption
Logging

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ For specifying whether or not a spectrum
should be written to the SD card for eachmeasurement period configured.

Factory settingOn
Dspl. spctr. lower limit

190 to 1000 nm
Factory setting
350 nm

Dspl. spctr. upper limit

Configures the spectrum limits for the spectrum
shown

350 to 1000 nm
Factory setting
1000 nmEndress+Hauser

81

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Tag check
This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting
EH_CM44P_

Group

Numerical

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Factory setting0

Sensor change
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.
Sensor factory setting
Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

82

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

10.3.2Current inputs

The input can be used as the data source for limit switches and logbooks, for example.
Furthermore, external values can be made available as set points for controllers.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Current input x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Mode

Selection• Off• 0 - 20mA
• 4 - 20mA

‣ Select the same current range as in the data
source (connected device).

Factory setting
4 - 20mA
Input variable

Selection• Flow rate
• Parameter• Current‣ Select the input variable.

Factory setting
Current
Meas. value format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###‣ Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Parameter name
Input variable = Parameter
Unit of measure
Input variable = Parameter
Lower range value
Input variable = Parameter

Customized text, 16
characters‣ Assign a useful name, e.g. the parameter

Customized text, 16
characters

You cannot choose the unit from a list. If you
want to use a unit, you must enter it here ascustomized text.

-20.0 ... Upper range
value <unit of measure>‣ Enter the measuring range. The lower andFactory setting
0.0 <engineering unit>
Upper range value
Input variable = Parameter

Lower range value to
10000.0 <engineeringunit>

name that the data source also uses.

upper range values are assigned to the 0 or
4 mA value and the 20 mA value
respectively. The system uses theengineering unit which you entered
beforehand.

Factory setting
10.0 <engineering unit>
Damping

0 to 60 s
Factory setting0s

1)

The damping causes a floating average curve of
the measured values over the time specified.

x:y = slot no. : input number

10.4

Outputs

10.4.1

Current outputs

The basic version of the device always has two current outputs.
You can configure additional current outputs with extension modules.
Setting the current output range‣ Menu/Setup/General settings: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA.

Endress+Hauser

83

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Current output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Current output

Selection
• Off
• On

Use this function to activate or deactivate avariable being output at the current output

Factory setting
Off
Source of data

Selection• None• Connected inputs• Controller

The sources of data on offer depend on yourdevice version.
The all the sensors and controllers connected to
inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting
None
Measured value

Selection• None• Depends on the Sourceof data

The measured value you can select depends on
the option selected under Source of data.

Factory setting
None
The list of dependent measured values is provided in the Measured value table, subject to the Source of data→ 84.
Apart from measured values from connected sensors, you can also select a controller as the data source.
The best way to do so is by using the Additional functions menu. Here, you can select and configure thecurrent output for outputting the controlled variable.
Range lower value
Range upper value

Hold behavior

Range of adjustment andfactory settings depend on
the Measured value

You can output the entire measuring range orjust some of it at the current output. To do so,
specify the upper and lower range values inaccordance with your requirements.

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• IgnoreFreeze last value
The device freezes the last current value.

Factory setting
Depends on thechannel:output
Hold current

0.0 to 23.0 mA

Hold behavior = Fixed value

Factory setting
22.0 mA

1)

Fixed value
You define a fixed current value that is output at
the output.
IgnoreA hold does not affect this current output.

‣ Specify which current should be output at
this current output in the hold state.

x:y = slot:output number

Measured value depending on the Source of data
Source of data

Measured value

Spectrometer

Selection
• L*
• a*
• b*
• Temperature

pH Glass

Selection• Raw value mV• pH• Temperature

pH ISFET

ORP

84

Selection• Temperature• ORP mV
• ORP %

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Source of data

Measured value

Oxygen (amp.)

Selection• Temperature• Partial pressure• Concentration liquid• Saturation• Raw value nA(only Oxygen (amp.))• Raw value μs(only Oxygen (opt.))

Oxygen (opt.)

Cond iCond cCond c 4-pol

Selection• Temperature• Conductivity• Resistance(only Cond c)• Concentration(only Cond i and Cond c 4-pol)Disinfection

Selection• Temperature• Sensor current• Concentration

ISE

Selection• Temperature• pH• Ammonium• Nitrate• Potassium• Chloride

TU/TS

Selection• Temperature• Turbidity g/l(only TU/TS)• Turbidity FNU(only TU/TS)• Turbidity Formazine(only TU)
• Turbidity solid(only TU)

TU

NitrateSelection• Temperature• NO3• NO3-N

Ultrasonic interface

Selection
Interface

SAC

Selection• Temperature• SAC• Transm.
• Absorption
• COD
• BOD

Controller 1

Selection• Bipolar(only for current outputs)• Unipolar+• Unipolar-

Controller 2Mathematical functions All the mathematical functions can also be used as a data source and the calculated
value can be used as the measured value.

Endress+Hauser

85

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Outputting the controller manipulated variable via the current output
Unipolar+ Assign to the output to which an actuator that can increase the measured value
is connected. Unipolar- Assign to the output to which an actuator that can decrease themeasured value is connected.
To output the manipulated variable of a two-sided controller, positive manipulated
variables and negative manipulated variables generally have to be output to different
actuators, as most actuators are able to influence the process in one direction only (not inboth). For this purpose, the instrument splits the bipolar manipulated variable y into two
unipolar manipulated variables, y+ and y‐.
Only the two unipolar manipulated variable parts are available for selection for outputting
to modulated relays. If outputting the values via a current output, you also have thepossibility of outputting the bipolar manipulated variable y to one current output only
(split range).

10.4.2

Alarm relay and optional relays

The basic version of the device always has one alarm relay. Additional relays are alsoavailable depending on the version of the device.
The following functions can be output via a relay:• Limit switch status• Controller manipulated variable for controlling an actuator• Diagnostic messages• Status of a cleaning function in order to control a pump or a valve
You can assign a relay to multiple inputs in order to clean several sensors with justone cleaning unit, for example.
Menu/Setup/Outputs/Alarm relay or relay at channel no.
Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection• Off• Limit switch• Controller• Diagnostics• Cleaning(sensor)• Formula(sensor)• Device status signal

The following functions depend on the option
selected.
These versions are illustrated individually in thefollowing sections to provide a clearer
understanding of the options.
Function = Off
Switches off the relay function and means nofurther settings are required.

Factory setting• Alarm relays:
Diagnostics• Other relays:
Off

86

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Outputting the status of a limit switch
Function = Limit switch
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection
Limit switch 1 ... 8

Select the limit switch via which the status of therelay is to be output.

Factory setting
None

The limit switches are configured in the menu:
Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches.
the ALL and NONE soft keys to select Useor deselect all the limit switches in one go.

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore
Factory setting
IgnoreOutputting the manipulated variable of a controller
To output a controller manipulated variable via a relay, the relay is modulated. The relay isenergized (pulse, t1) and is then de-energized (interval, t0).
Function = Controller
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection• None• Controller 1• Controller 2‣ Select the controller that should act as thedata source.

Factory setting
None
Operating mode

Selection
• PWM
• PFM

PWM=pulse width modulation
PFM=pulse frequency modulation

Factory setting
PWM

Endress+Hauser

87

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

1. PWM (pulse width modulation):
The duty cycle is varied within a period T (T=t1+t0). The cycle duration remains
constant.
y = t1 / T
10 %

50 %
t1

100 %

t0

1 "High"

0 "Low"

t
T

0

 85

2T

3T

Typical application: solenoid valve

2. PFM (pulse frequency modulation):
Here, pulses of a constant length (t1) are output and the interval between the pulses
varies (t0). At a maximum frequency, t1 = t0.
y = f / fmax= Tmin / T
100 %

20 %

50 %
t1

1 "High"t00 "Low"

t
T

 86

2T

3T

Typical application: dosing pump

Function = Controller
Function

Options

Info

Actuator type

Selection• None• Unipolar(-)• Unipolar(+)

Here you specify what part of the controller
should power the relay. Unipolar(+) is the partof the manipulated variable which the controller
uses to increase the process value (e.g. forheating purposes). Alternatively, selectUnipolar(-) if you are connecting an actuator to
the relay that reduces the controlled variable(e.g. for cooling purposes).

Factory setting
None

Cycle duration
Operating mode = PWM

Shortest turn-on time to999.0 s‣ Specify the cycle duration within which theduty cycle should be varied (only PWM).

Factory setting
10.0 s
The settings for Cycle duration and Shortest turn-on time influence one another. The following applies: Cycleduration ≥ Shortest turn-on time.

88

Shortest turn-on time

0.3 s to Cycle duration

Operating mode = PWM

Factory setting
0.3 s

Pulses that are shorter than this limit value are
not output in order to conserve the actuator.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Function = Controller
Function

Options

Info

Maximum frequency

1 to 180 min-1

Operating mode = PFM

Factory setting
60 min‐1

Maximum number of pulses per minute
The controller calculates the pulse duration
based on this setting.

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore
Factory setting
IgnoreOutputting diagnostic messages via the relay
If a relay is defined as a diagnostic relay (Function = Diagnostics), it operates in "Failsafe mode".
This means that the relay is always energized ("normally closed", n.c.) in the basic state if
an error is not present. This enables it to also indicate a voltage drop, for example.
The alarm relay always works in the failsafe mode.
You can output two categories of diagnostic messages via the relay:• Diagnostic messages from one of the four NAMUR classes →  136• Diagnostic messages which you have individually assigned to the relay output
A message is individually assigned to the relay output at 2 specific points in the menu:• Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior(device-specific messages)• Menu/Setup/Inputs/<Sensor>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior(sensor-specific messages)
Before you can assign a special message to the relay output in Diag. behavior, youneed to set Outputs/relay x:y or /Alarm relay/Function = Diagnostics.
Function = Diagnostics
Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection• as assigned• NAMUR M• NAMUR S• NAMUR C• NAMUR F

as assigned
If this option is selected, the diagnostic messages
which you have individually assigned to the relay
are output via the relay.

Factory setting• Relay:as assigned• Alarm relays:
NAMUR F

Attributed diagnostic messages Read only
Operating mode = asassigned

Endress+Hauser

NAMUR M ... NAMUR F
If you decided to use one of the NAMUR classes,
all the messages that are assigned to theindividual class are output via the relay. You canalso change the NAMUR class assignment forevery diagnostic message.
(Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended
setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior or
Menu/Setup/Inputs/<Sensor>/Extended
setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior)
All the messages assigned to the relay output
appear on the display. You do not have theoption of editing the information here.

89Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Outputting diagnosis messages from the CYA27 assembly
Function = Device status signal
Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection• OK• NAMUR M• NAMUR S• NAMUR C• NAMUR F

The function allows the status signals of the
CYA27 assembly to be output via a relay.
Several signals can be output in parallel during
this process.

Factory setting
All disabled

Outputting the status of a cleaning function
Function = Cleaning
Function

Options

Info

Assignments

Selection• None• Depends on the type ofcleaning

Here you can specify how a cleaning function
should be displayed for the relay.

Factory setting
None

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore
Factory setting
Ignore1)

You have the following options depending on thecleaning program that is selected (Menu/Setup/
Additional functions/Cleaning:• Cleaning type = Standard clean
Cleaning 1 - Water, Cleaning 2 - Water,
Cleaning 3 - Water, Cleaning 4 - Water• Cleaning type = Chemoclean
Cleaning 1 - Water, Cleaning 1 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 2 - Water, Cleaning 2 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 3 - Water, Cleaning 3 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 4 - Water, Cleaning 4 - Cleaner• Cleaning type = Chemoclean Plus
4x Cleaning 1 - %0V, 4x Cleaning 2 - %0V 1)
Freeze last value
The device freezes the last measured value.
Fixed value
You define a fixed measured value that is output
at the output.
IgnoreA hold has no effect.

%0V is variable text which you can assign in Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Chemoclean
Plus/Output label 1 ... 4.

FormulaFunction = Controller
Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• PWM
• PFM

PWM=pulse width modulation
PFM=pulse frequency modulation→  88

Factory setting
PWM
Source of data

Range lower value

90

Selection• List of available
formulas• Maximum of 8 formulas

Mathematical functions of type Formula must be
available.

‣ Select the formula which is to serve as a data
source.

0 to 9999

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Function = Controller
Function

Options

Range upper value

Range lower value to9999

Cycle duration

Shortest turn-on time to999.0 sOperating mode = PWMInfo‣ Specify the cycle duration within which theduty cycle should be varied (only PWM).

Factory setting
10.0 ssettings for Cycle duration and Shortest turn-on time affect one another. The following applies: The
Cycle duration ≥ Shortest turn-on time.
Shortest turn-on time

0.3 s to Cycle duration

Operating mode = PWM

Factory setting
0.3 s

Maximum frequency

1 to 180 min-1

Operating mode = PFM

Factory setting
60 min‐1

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore

Pulses that are shorter than this limit value are
not output in order to conserve the actuator.

Maximum number of pulses per minute
The controller calculates the pulse duration
based on this setting.

Factory setting
Ignore10.4.3

HART

Specify which device variables should be output via HART communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 device variables.
1.

Specify the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs and controllers.

2.

Select the measured value to be output.

3.

Specify the behavior in "Hold" status. (Configuration options of Source of data,
Measured value and Hold behavior) →  84

Please note that if you select Hold behavior = Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
More information is provided in:Operating Instructions "HART Communication", BA00486C

10.4.4

PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET

Device variables (device → PROFIBUS/PROFINET)
Here you can specify which process values should be mapped to the PROFIBUS function
blocks and are thereby available for transmission via PROFIBUS communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 device variables (AI Blocks).

Endress+Hauser

1.

Define the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs, current inputs and mathematical functions.

2.

Choose the measured value to be transmitted.

3.

Define how the device should behave in the hold state. (Configuration options ofSource of data, Measured value and Hold behavior) →  84

91

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Please note that if you select Hold behavior= Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
In addition, you can define 8 binary variables (DI Blocks):
1.

Define the data source.

2.

Select the limit switch or relay whose status is to be transmitted.

PROFIBUS/PROFINET variables (PROFIBUS/PROFINET → device)
A maximum of 4 analog (AO) and 8 digital (DO) PROFIBUS variables are available asmeasured values in the controller, limit switch or current output menus.
Example: Using an AO or DO value as the set point for the controller
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1
1.

In the specified menu, define PROFIBUS as the data source.

2.

Select the desired analog output (AO) or digital output (DO) as the measured value.
Further information on "PROFIBUS" can be found in the Guideline for Communication
via PROFIBUS, SD01188C
Further information on "PROFINET" can be found in the Guideline for Communication
via PROFINET, SD02490C

10.4.5

Modbus RS485 and Modbus TCP

Specify which process values should be output via Modbus RS485 Communication or via
Modbus TCP.
In the case of Modbus RS485, you can switch between the RTU and the ASCII protocol.
You can define a maximum of 16 device variables.
1.

Define the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs and controllers.

2.

Select the measured value to be output.

3.

Define how the device should behave in the hold state. (Configuration options ofSource of data, Measured value and Hold behavior) →  84

Please note that if you select Hold behavior = Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
Further information on "Modbus" can be found in the Guideline for Communication via
Modbus, SD01189C

10.4.6

Ethernet/IP

Specify which process values should be output via EtherNet/IP communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 analog device variables (AI).
1.

Define the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs and controllers.

2.

Select the measured value to be output.

3.

Define how the device should behave in the hold state. (Configuration options ofSource of data, Measured value and Hold behavior) →  84

4.

In the case of controllers, also specify the type of manipulated variable.

Please note that if you select Hold behavior = Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
92

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

In addition you can define digital device variables (DI):‣ Define the data source.
 You can choose from relays, binary inputs and limit switches.
For further information on "EtherNet/IP", see the Guideline for Communication via
EtherNet/IP, SD01293C

10.5

Binary inputs and outputs

Hardware options, such as the DIO module with 2 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs orfieldbus module 485DP/485MB enable the following:• Via a digital input signal• measuring range switching for conductivity (upgrade code required, →  76)• switching between different calibration datasets in the case of optical sensors• external hold• a cleaning interval to be triggered• PID controller switch-on/switch-off, e.g. via the proximity switch of the CCA250• the use of the input as an "analog input" for pulse-frequency modulation (PFM)• Via a digital output signal• diagnostic states, point level switches, or similar states transmitted statically (similar
to a relay)• the dynamic transmission (comparable to a non-wearing "analog output") of PFM
signals, e.g. to control dosing pumps

Endress+Hauser

93

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10.5.1

Application examples

Chlorine regulation with feedforward control
CM44xX
DIO
47

CCA250
INS

48
BN
BK
BU

91

Dig.in92

CM44xXDIO
Dig.out: PFM

1
CCA250CM44x / CM44xR

45
+
46
–
2
Flow, e.g. Promag53

CM44xX: DIO
Dig.in: PFM
91
92

3

A
A0028316

 87
1
2
3
A

Example of chlorine control with feedforward control

Connection of the inductive proximity switch INS of CCA250 to the digital input of the DIO module
Connection of the signal from a flowmeter to the digital input of the DIO module
Activation of a (pulse) dosing pump via the digital output of the DIO module
Dosing pump

Utilize the advantage of the effectively wear-free control with binary outputs versus acontrol system with relay. With pulse frequency modulation (PFM), it is possible to achieve
virtually continuous dosing using a dosing pump with higher input frequency.

2)

94

1.

Connect the INS proximity switch of the CCA250 assembly to a digital input of the
DIO module (e.g. slot 6, port 1).

2.

In the software, configure a controller and as the source select the binary input(e.g.Binary input 1) to which the proximity switch is connected. (Menu/Additional
functions/Controllers/Controller 1/Controller enable = Binary input 1)

3.

Signal type: For the selected input, select the factory setting (Static signal).

4.

Connect the measured value of a flowmeter to the second input of the DIO module(e.g. slot 6, port 2).

5.

Signal type: for this input, select PFM . (Menu/Inputs/Binary input 6:2/Signal
type = PFM)

6.

Input variable: select the corresponding measured value (Flow rate).
 You can now use the input you have just configured as the disturbance variablefor your controller 2).

An activation code, Order No. 71211288, is necessary for the "feedforward control" function.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

7.

Disturbance variable: in the controller menu, select the binary input to which you
have connected the flow measured value. (Menu/Additional functions/Controllers/
Controller 1/Disturbance variable/Source of data = Binary input 6:2 andMeasured value = PFM value)

8.

You can activate a dosing pump through PFM via a digital output of the DIO module.
Connect the pump to an output of the DIO module (e.g. slot 6, port 1) and select thefollowing settings in the menu: Menu/Outputs/Binary output 6:1/Signal type =PFM and Source of data = Controller 1.

Take the direction of action of your dosing into account. Select the correct parameter(Actuator type = Unipolar+ or Unipolar-).
You must make additional settings in the controller menu to fully customize the control tosuit your process conditions.
CM44x as the cleaning master
47
48
1
91

2

Dig.inCM44x / CM44xR

CM44x / CM44xR

92

3
CM44x / CM44xR
A0028320

 88
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Example of a central cleaning control

External cleaning trigger at the binary input
Transferring the external hold over binary output to other measuring devices without connected cleaning
functions
Transferring the cleaning trigger over a binary output to other self-cleaning measuring points

1.

An external trigger actuates a cleaning operation at the master.
A cleaning unit is connected via a relay or a binary output, for example.

2.

The cleaning trigger is transferred to another device via a binary output. This does
not have its own connected cleaning unit, but its sensors are installed in the medium
affected by cleaning the master and are set to hold by the trigger.

3.

The trigger is transferred via an additional binary output to another device, whose
connected sensors have their own cleaning units. The signal can be used tosimultaneously activate a self-cleaning with the master.

95

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

10.5.2Binary input configuration

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Binary input x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Binary input

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the input on/off

Factory settingOn
Signal type

Selection• Static signal• PFM
Factory setting
Static signal‣ Select the signal type.
Static signal
Use this setting to read out the position of, forexample, an on/off switch, an inductive
proximity switch or a PLC binary output.
Signal application: for measuring range
switching, acceptance of an external hold, as acleaning trigger or for controller activation
PFM
The PFM setting produces a pulse-frequencymodulated signal that is subsequently available
on the device as a quasi-continuous process
value.
Example: Measuring signal of a flowmeter

Signal type = Static signal
Signal level

Selection• Low• HighSpecifies which input signal levels should
activate, for example, measuring range
switching or a cleaning.

Factory setting
High

Low
Input signals between 0 and 5 V DC
High
Input signals between 11 and 30 V DC

Signal type = PFM
Max. frequency

100.00 to 1000.00 Hz
Factory setting
1000.00 Hz

Meas. value format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###

Maximum frequency of the PFM input signal
Is to equal the maximum possible upper limit of
the measuring range.
If the value selected is too small, higher
frequencies will not be detected. If the value is
too large, on the other hand, the resolution forsmall frequencies will be relatively inexact.

‣ Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting
#.##

96

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Binary input x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Input variable

Selection• Frequency• Parameter• Flow rate

Frequency
Display in Hz in the measuring menu

Factory setting
Frequency

Parameter
You subsequently determine the parametername and unit. These are then displayed in themeasuring menu.
Flow rate
For connecting a flowmeter

Parameter name
Input variable = Parameter
Unit of measure
Input variable = Parameter
Flow rate unit
Input variable = Flow rate

Customized text, 16
characters‣ Define a name for the parameter, e.g.

Customized text, 16
characters‣ Specify the unit for your parameter, e.g.

Selection
• l/s
• l/h
• m³/s• m³/h
• cfs
• cfd
• mgd

‣ Define the unit for the flow.

"Pressure".

"hPa".

cfs = cubic feet per second
cfd = cubic feet per day
mgd = mega gallon per day

Factory setting
l/s
Lower range value-2000.00 to 0.00

Input variable = Parameter or Factory setting
Flow rate
0.00
Upper range value

0.00 to 10000.00

Input variable = Parameter or Factory setting
Flow rate
0.00
Damping

0 to 60 s
Factory setting0s

1)

The start of measuring range corresponds to afrequency of 0 Hz.
Your previously defined unit is additionallydisplayed.
The end of measuring range corresponds to the
maximum frequency defined above.
Your previously defined unit is additionallydisplayed.
The damping causes a floating average curve of
the measured values over the time specified.

x:y = slot no. : input number

10.5.3

Configuration of binary outputs

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Binary output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Binary output

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the output on/off

Factory settingOn
Signal type

Selection• Static signal• PFM
Factory setting
Static signal

Endress+Hauser‣ Select the signal type.
Static signal
Comparable to a relay: output of a diagnostic
status or a limit switch
PFM
You can output a measured value, e.g. thechlorine value or the manipulated variable of acontroller.
It functions as a "wear-free" switching contactthat can be used to control a dosing pump,for example.

97

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Binary output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Selection• None• Limit switches• Diagnostics message• Cleaning

Source for the outputted switching state
The following functions depend on the option
selected.
Function = None switches off the function.
There are no other settings.

Signal type = Static signal
Function

Factory setting
None
Assignments
Function = Cleaning

Data sources
Function = Limit switches

Multiple selection• Cleaning 1 - Water ...
• Cleaning 4 - Cleaner

Here you can decide which binary outputs should
be used for activating the valves and pumps.
Here you specifically assign a control signal tothe binary output for the cleaner/water dosingof a cleaning program.
You can define cleaning programs under: Menu/
Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Multiple selection
Limit switch 1 ... 8‣ Select the limit switches that should be
output via the binary output.

Configuration of the limit switches: Menu/
Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches.
Operating mode
Function = Diagnostics
message

Selection• as assigned• NAMUR M• NAMUR S• NAMUR C• NAMUR F
Factory setting
as assigned

as assigned
With this selection, the diagnosis messages aretransmitted over the binary output that you
individually allocated to it.
NAMUR M ... F
When you choose one of the Namur classes, allmessages allocated to that particular class are
output.
You can change the Namur class assignment foreach diagnostic message.

Signal type = PFM
Max. frequency

1.00 to 1000.00 Hz
Factory setting
1000.00 Hz

Meas. value format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###

Maximum frequency of the PFM output signal
Is to equal the maximum possible upper limit of
the measuring range.

‣ Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting
#.##

98

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Binary output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection• None• Sensor inputs• Binary inputs• Controller• Fieldbus signals• Mathematical functions

Source whose value should be read out as afrequency via the binary output.

Factory setting
None
Measuring value
Source of data ≠ Controller
Actuator type
Source of data = Controller

Selection
Depends on:
Source of data

‣ Choose the measured value which should be

Selection• None• Bipolar• Unipolar+• Unipolar-‣ Determines which part of the controller

Factory setting
None

Unipolar+Part of the manipulated variable that thecontroller uses to increase the process value

output as the frequency via the binary
output.

should control the connected actuators, e.g.
the dosing pump.

Bipolar"Split range"

UnipolarFor connected actuators that decrease thecontrolled variable
Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze• Fixed value• NoneFactory setting
None

Hold value

0 ... 100 %Hold behavior = Fixed value

Factory setting0%Error behavior

Selection• Freeze• Fixed value
Factory setting
Fixed value

Error value

0 ... 100 %Error behavior = Fixed value

Factory setting
0%

1)FreezeThe device freezes the last value.
Fixed value
You define a fixed current value that istransmitted at the output.
None
A hold does not affect this output.

FreezeThe device freezes the last value.
Fixed value
You define a fixed current value that istransmitted at the output.

x:y = slot no. : input number

10.6

Additional functions

10.6.1

Limit switch

There are different ways to configure a limit switch:• Assigning a switch-on and switch-off point• Assigning a switch-on and switch-off delay for a relay• Setting an alarm threshold and also outputting an error message• Starting a cleaning function

Endress+Hauser

99

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection• None• Sensor inputs• Binary inputs• Controller• Fieldbus signals• Mathematical functions• MRS set 1 ... 2‣ Specify the input or output which is to be thedata source for the limit switch.

The sources of data on offer depend on yourdevice version.
You can choose from connected sensors, binary
inputs, fieldbus signals, mathematical functions,controllers and sets for measuring range
switching.

Factory setting
None
Measuring value

Selection
Depends on:
Source of data

‣ Select the measured value, see the following
table.

Measured value depending on the Source of data
Source of data

Measured value

Spectrometer

Selection
• L*
• a*
• b*
• Temperature

pH Glass

Selection• Raw value mV• pH• Temperature

pH ISFET

ORP

Selection• Temperature• ORP mV
• ORP %

Oxygen (amp.)

Selection• Temperature• Partial pressure• Concentration liquid• Saturation• Raw value nA(only Oxygen (amp.))• Raw value μs(only Oxygen (opt.))

Oxygen (opt.)

Cond iCond cCond c 4-pol

100

Selection• Temperature• Conductivity• Resistance(only Cond c)• Concentration(only Cond i and Cond c 4-pol)Disinfection

Selection• Temperature• Sensor current• Concentration

ISE

Selection• Temperature• pH• Ammonium• Nitrate• Potassium• Chloride

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Source of data

Measured value

TU/TS

Selection• Temperature• Turbidity g/l(only TU/TS)• Turbidity FNU(only TU/TS)• Turbidity Formazine(only TU)
• Turbidity solid(only TU)

TU

NitrateSelection• Temperature• NO3• NO3-N

Ultrasonic interface

Selection
Interface

SAC

Selection• Temperature• SAC• Transm.
• Absorption
• COD
• BOD

Controller 1

Selection• Bipolar(only for current outputs)• Unipolar+• Unipolar-

Controller 2Mathematical functions All the mathematical functions can also be used as a data source and the calculated
value can be used as the measured value.

You can monitor the manipulated variable by assigning the controller manipulated
variable to a limit switch (e. g. configure a dosing time alarm).
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning program

Selection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4

Use this function to choose which cleaning
instance should start when the limit switch isactive.

Factory setting
None
Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Activating/deactivating the limit switch

Factory setting
Off
Operating mode

Selection• Above limit check• Below limit check• In range check• Out of range check• Change rate

Type of limit value monitoring:• Limit value overshoot or undershoot→  89
• Measured value within or outside a range→  90• Rate of change →  92

Factory setting
Above limit check

Endress+Hauser

101

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Limit value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Operating mode = Above limit check or Below
limit check

A

B

MV

MV
2

1

1

2
t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

t

t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

t
A0028523

 89

Exceeding (A) and undershooting (B) a limit value (without hysteresis and switch-on delay)

1
Limit value
2
Alarm range
t1,3,5 No action
t2,4 An event is generated• If measured values (MV) are increasing, the relay contact is closed when the switch-on point is exceeded(Limit value + Hysteresis) and the start delay (Start delay) has elapsed.
• If measured values are decreasing, the relay contact is reset when the switch-off point is undershot (Limitvalue - Hysteresis) and after the drop-out delay (Switch off delay).
Range lower value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Range upper value

Operating mode = Out of range check or In
range check

A

B

MV

MV
3

1

1
3

2

2
3
t1

t2

t3

t4

t

t1

t2

t3

t4

t
A0028524

 90
1
2
3
t1-4

Range monitoring outside (A) and within (B) a range (without hysteresis and switch-on delay)

End of range
Start of range
Alarm range
An event is generated• If measured values (MV) are increasing, the relay contact is closed when the switch-on point is exceeded(Range lower value + Hysteresis) and the start delay (Start delay) has elapsed.
• If measured values are decreasing, the relay contact is reset when the switch-off point is undershot (Range
upper value - Hysteresis) and after the drop-out delay (Switch off delay).

102

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Hysteresis

Settings depend on themeasured value

Operating mode ≠ Change rate
The hysteresis is needed to ensure a stableswitching behavior.
The device software adds or subtracts the value
set here to/from the limit value (Limit value,
Range lower value or Range upper value). This
results in double the Hysteresis value for thehysteresis range around the limit value. An
event is then only generated if the measured
value (MV) completely passes through thehysteresis range.

MV
2
1

3

t1

t2

t
A0028525

 91
1
2
3
t1,2

Hysteresis taking the example of limit value
overshootLimit value
Alarm range
Hysteresis range
An event is generated

Start delay

0 to 9999 s

Operating mode ≠ Change
rate

Factory setting
0s

Synonyms: pick-up and drop-out delay

Switch off delay
Operating mode ≠ Change
rate
Delta value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Delta time

00:00:01 ... 23:59:00
Factory setting
01:00:00

Auto confirm

00:01 to 23:59
Factory setting
00:01

MV

MV3
MV1

t4

t5 t6

The slope of the measured value (MV) is
monitored in this mode.
If, in the specified time frame (Delta time), themeasured value increases or decreases by morethan the specified value (Delta value), an event
is generated. No further event is generated if thevalue continues to experience such a steep
increase or decrease. If the slope is back below
the limit value, the alarm status is reset after apreset time (Auto confirm).
Events are triggered by the following conditionsin the example given:t2 - t1 < Delta time and ∆MV1 > Delta value
t4 - t3 >Auto confirm and ∆MV2 < Delta value
t6 - t5 < Delta time and ∆MV3 > Delta value

MV2

t1 t2 t3

Operating mode = Change ratet
A0028526

 92

Rate of change

10.6.2Time switch

A time switch provides a time-controlled, binary process value. This can be used as asource by the "Formula" mathematical function.

Endress+Hauser

103

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

A

y
B
1

0
t

C

A0041544

 93
t
y
A
B
C

Signal pattern of a time switch

Timeline
Signal level (1 = on, 0 = off)
PeriodSignal duration
Start time (Start date, Start time)

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Time switches/ Time switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• On
• Off

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Start date

01.01.2000 to 31.12.2099 ‣Enter start date

FormatDD.MM.YYYY
Start time

00:00:00 to 23:59:59‣ Enter start time

Formathh.mm.ss
Signal duration

00:00:03 to 2400:00:00
Formathh.mm.ss

Period00:00:03 to 2400:00:00

Duration of the high signal level at the start of acycle

Duration of a cycle

Formathh.mm.ss
SignalDisplay only

Current process value of the time switch

Next signal date

Display only

Date of the next signal

Next signal time

Display only

Time of the next signal

Example 1: Time-based set point for a temperature controller
The temperature should increase to 21 °C from 08:00 every day, and then to 23 °C for 5
hours from 12:00. The temperature should be controlled to fall back down to 18 °C from17.00. Two time switches are defined for this purpose which are used in a MF1: Formulamathematical function. Using the mathematical function, an analog temperature set pointis thus available for a controller.

104

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

T
[° C]

T1
T2

23
21

18

0

8

12

17

t [h]
A0041704

 94Time-based temperature control

1.

Program Time switch 1 (T1):• Start date = 01.01.2020• Start time = 08:00:00• Signal duration = 09:00:00• Period = 24:00:00
2.

Define Time switch 2 (T2):• Start date = 01.01.2020• Start time = 12:00:00• Signal duration = 05:00:00• Period = 24:00:00
3.

Create Formula mathematical function.

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions• MF1: Formula• Tracking = On
• Source A = Time switch 1• Source B = Time switch 2• Formula = 18.0 + 3*NUM(A) + 2*NUM(B)
Explanation: NUM converts the logical value to a numerical value and thus enables
multiplication.
• 3*NUM(A) results in the value 3.0 from 08:00 to 17:00 and 0.0 outside of this time
period.
• 2*NUM(B) results in the value 2.0 from 12:00 to 17:00 and 0.0 outside of this time
period.
The formula thus yields one of these analog values depending on the time: 18.0, 21.0 or
23.0. This analog value can be used as a set point for a temperature controller.
Example 2: Time-based condition
A pump should switch on (via a relay) for 10 minutes every 2 hours. This only applies if
the pH value is lower than 4.0.
1.

Program Time switch 1:• Start date = 01.01.2020• Start time = 00:00:00• Signal duration = 00:10:00• Period = 02:00:00
2.

Endress+Hauser

Create Formula mathematical function.

105

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions• MF1: Formula• Tracking = On
• Source A = Time switch 1• Source B = pH value of a Memosens pH input• Formula = A AND(B<4.0)
3.

Use the formula as the data source of a relay.

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Relay[x:y]• Function = Formula• Operating mode = Static signal• Source of data = MF1: Formula
The formula yields a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) and is thus suitable to trigger a relay
directly in the static operating mode. Time switch 1 provides a TRUE value for 10 minutes
every 2 hours but only if the pH value has dropped to below 4 at the same time.

10.6.3Controller

Controller structure in Laplace representation

A

B

A0015007

 95

Block diagram of the controller structureA

Neutral zone

I

Integral value

B

Output limitingD

Derivative value

Kp

Gain (P‐value)αTV

Damping time constant with α = 0 to 1

Tn

Integral action time (I‐value)eControl deviation

Tv

Derivative action time (D‐value)w

Set point

Tw

Time constant for set point dampingxControlled variable

Twu

Time constant for anti‐windup feedbacky

Manipulated variableP

Proportional value

The controller structure of the device comprises set point damping at the input to prevent
erratic changes in the manipulated variable if the set point changes. The difference
between the set point w and the controlled variable (measured value) X results in thecontrol deviation which is filtered by a neutral zone.
The neutral zone is used to suppress control deviations (e) that are too small. The control
deviation thus filtered is now fed to the actual PID controller which divides into 3 parts
based on the P (proportional), I (integral) and D (derivative) values (top-down). The
integral section (middle) also comprises an anti‐windup mechanism for limiting the
integrator. A low-pass filter is added to the D‐section to damp hard D‐terms in the
manipulated variable. The sum of the 3 sections results in the internal controller
manipulated variable which is limited according to the settings (for PID‐2s to ‐100% to+100%).

106

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

The graphic does not illustrate a downstream filter for limiting the rate of change of themanipulated variable (can be configured in the menu in Max y change rate).
In the menu do not configure the gain Kp. Instead configure the reciprocal value, theproportional band Xp (Kp=1/Xp).
Parameter configuration
Make the following decisions to configure a controller:• (1) What type of process can your process be assigned to? → Process type
• (2) Should it be possible to influence the measured variable (controlled variable) in one
direction or in both directions? One-sided or two-sided controller, → Controller type
• (3) What should be the controlled variable (sensor, measured value)? → Controlled
variable• (4) Do you have a disturbance variable that should be active at the controller output? →Disturbance variable• (5) Specify the parameters for the controller:• Set point, → Setpoint• Neutral zone, → Xn
• Proportional band, → Xp
• Integral action time (I-value), → Tn
• Derivative action time (D-value), → Tv
• (6) What should the controller do in the event of a hold (measured error, sensor
replacement, cleaning etc.)?
• Pause or continue with dosing? →Hold behavior/Manipulated Variable• At the end of a hold, continue or restart the control loop (affects I‐value)? →Holdbehavior/State• (7) How should the actuator be triggered?
• Unipolar+: assign this setting to the output for an actuator which can increase themeasured value.
• Unipolar-: assign this setting to the output for an actuator which can decrease themeasured value.
• Bipolar: select this setting if you want to output the manipulated variable via one
current output only (split range).
• (8) Configure the outputs and switch on the controller.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function

Options

Info

Control

Selection• Off• Automatic• Manual mode

‣ First configure the controller and leave theFactory settingOffswitch at the factory setting (Off).

Once you have made all the settings, you canassign the controller to an output and switch iton.

Manual modey-100 to 100 %Factory setting0%

y actual output

Read only‣ Specify the manipulated variable that should
be output in manual mode.

Manipulated variable actually output.

Setpoint

Current set pointx

Current measured value

Disturbance variable

Current measured value of disturbance variable

Norm. disturb. value
Name

Free text‣ Give the controller a name so you canidentify it later on.

Endress+Hauser

107

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function

Options

Info

Controller enable

Selection• None• Binary inputs• Limit switches• Fieldbus variables

In connection with the DIO module, you canselect a binary input signal, e. g.from an
inductive proximity switch, as a source forenabling the controller.

Factory setting
None
Setup Level

Selection• Standard• Advanced

Changes the number of parameters that can be
configured. → Parameters →  111
Standard: If you choose this, the other controller
parameters are active nevertheless. The factory
settings are used. These suffice in most cases.

Factory settingStandard
Process type

‣ Decide what type of process best describes

Selection• Inline• Batchyour particular process.

Factory setting
InlineBatch process
The medium is in a closed system.
The task of the control system is to dose in such a way that the measured value (controlled variable) changes
from its start value to its target value. No more dosing is needed once the set point has been reached and thesystem is stable. If the target value is overshot, a two-sided control system can compensate for this. In the caseof 2-sided batch control systems, a neutral zone is used/configured to suppress oscillations around the set
point.
In-line process
In an in-line process, the control system works with the medium flowing by in the process.
Here, the controller has the task of using the manipulated variable to set a mixture ratio between the medium
and dosing agent such that the resulting measured variable corresponds to the set point. The properties andvolume of the medium flow can change at any time and the controller has to react to these changes on acontinuous basis. If the flow rate and medium remain constant, the manipulated variable can also assume afixed value once the process has settled. Since the control process is never "finished" here, this type of control isalso referred to as continuous control.
A mixture of both process types can often be found in practice: the semi‐batch process. Depending on the ratio
between the flow and the container volume, this arrangement behaves either like a batch process oran in-line process.
Controller type

Selection• PID 1-sided• PID 2-sided

Depending on which actuator you haveconnected, you influence the process in only one
direction (e.g . heating) or in both directions(e. g. heating and cooling).

Factory setting
PID 2-sided

A 2‐sided controller can output a manipulated variable in the range from -100 % to +100 %, i. e. themanipulated variable is bipolar. The manipulated variable is positive if the controller should increase theprocess value. In the case of a pure P-controller, this means that the value of the controlled variable x is smaller
than the set point w. On the other hand, the manipulated variable is negative if the process value should bedecreased. The value for x is greater than the set point w.
y

Xp

Xp

+100 %
x<w
0%

x

w
x>w

-100 %

 96

108

Relationship y = (w-x)/Xp

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function

Options

Info

Effective direction

Selection• Direct• Reverse

In what direction should the controller influence
the measured value?
• The measured value should increase as aresult of dosing (e. g. heating)→ Reverse• The measured value should decrease as aresult of dosing (e. g. cooling)→ Direct

Controller type = PID 1-sided

Factory setting
ReverseA 1‐sided controller has a unipolar manipulated variable, i. e. it can only influence the process in one direction.
Reverse: If the controller should increase the process value, set this as the direction of action. The controller
becomes active when the process value is too small (range A).
Direct: With this direction of action, the controller acts as a "downwards controller". It becomes active when theprocess value (e. g. the temperature) is too high (range B).
y

Xp

Xp

+100 %

A
0%

x

w

B
-100 %

 97

Red: overlap between the curves of the two 1‐sided controllers.

Controlled variable
Source of data

Selection• None• Sensor inputs• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Binary inputs• Mathematical functions‣ Specify the input or output which should be

the source of data for the controlled variable.

Factory setting
None
Measured value

Selection‣
Depends on Source of data
Factory setting
None

Setpoint

You can use different measured values
depending on the data source. →  99
Target value of the controlled variableThis menu is not displayed if you selected afieldbus as the source (Source of data =fieldbus).

Range of adjustment andfactory setting dependingon the Source of data

‣ Specify the target value for the controlled

Tw

0.0 to 999.9 s

Time constant for the set point damping filter

Setup Level = Advanced

Factory setting
2.0 s

Setpoint

Disturbance variable

Endress+Hauser

Specify the measured value that should be
your controlled variable.

variable.

 optional, activation code necessary109

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function

Options

Info

In the case of "flowing medium" (in-line) controls, the flow rate may not be constant. In some circumstances,strong fluctuations are possible. In the case of a settled control system in which the flow rate is suddenly
halved, it is desirable that the dosed quantity from the controller is also directly halved. In order to achieve thistype of "flow-rate‐proportional" dosing, this task is not left to the I‐component of the controller, but rather one
enters the (to be measured) flow rate as disturbance variable z multiplicative at the controller output.
z
+
z0
w

1
1+Tw s

-

1
zp
er

+

y

x

x

Strictly speaking, feedforward control involves an open-loop control system, since its effect is not measured
directly. That means that the feed flow is directed exclusively forward. Hence the designation "feedforward
control".
For the additive feedforward control that is alternatively available in the device, the (standardized) disturbancevariable is added to the controller manipulated variable. This enables you to set up a type of variable base load
dosing.
The standardization of the disturbance variable is required both for multiplicative and for additive feedforward
control and is done using parameters Z0 (zero point) and Zp (proportional band): zn = (z ‐ z0)/zp
zn+100 %

0%

z0
z
zP

-100 %

ExampleFlowmeter with measuring range 0 to 200 m3/ h
The controller would currently dose 100% without feedforward control.
The feedforward control should be configured such that at z = 200m3/h, the controller still doses at 100% (zn =1).
If the flow rate drops, the dosing rate should be reduced, and at a flow rate of less than 4 m3/h, dosing shouldstop entirely (zn = 0).
→ Select the zero point z0 = 4 m3/h and the proportional band Zp= 196 m3/h.
Function

Selection• Off• Multiply• Add

Selecting multiplicative or additive feedforward
control

Factory setting
Off
Source of data

Selection• None• Sensor inputs• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Binary inputs• Mathematical functions‣ Specify the input which should be the sourceof data for the disturbance variable.

Factory setting
None

110

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function

Options

Info

Selection‣
Depends on Source of data

Measured value

Factory setting
None
Zp

Specify the measured value that should be
your disturbance variable.

You can use different measured values
depending on the data source. →  99

Range of adjustment
Proportional band ‐‐>depending on the selection
Zero pointof the measured value

Z0
Parameters

The Liquiline PID controller has been implemented in the serial structural form, i. e. it has the following
parameters:• Integral action time Tn• Derivative action time Tv• Proportional band Xp
Setup Level = Advanced: With this setup level, you can also configure the following:• Time constant Twu• Time constant α• Width of the neutral zone Xn• Width of the hysteresis range of the neutral zone Xhyst• Clock time of the controller
Tn

0.0 to 9999.0 s
Factory setting
0.0 s

The integral action time specifies the effect of
the I-value
If Tn > 0 the following applies: Clock < Twu <0.5(Tn + Tv)

The integral action time is the time needed in a step-function response to achieve a change in the manipulated
variable - as a result of the I effect - which has the same magnitude as the P-value.
e

0

t

y

PI

P
0

Tn

t

e = control deviation, e=w‐x (set point controlled variable)

Endress+Hauser

111

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function
Twu

Options

Info

0.1 to 999.9 s

Time constant for anti‐windup feedback
The lower the value the greater the integrator
inhibition. Exercise extreme caution when
making changes.
Clock < Twu < 0.5(Tn + Tv)

Factory setting
20.0 sTv

0.1 to 999.9 s
Factory setting
0.0 s

The derivative action time specifies the effect of
the D-value

The derivative action time is the time by which the ramp response of a PD controller reaches a specific value ofthe manipulated variable at an earlier stage than it would solely as a result of its P-value.

e

0

t
PD

y

P

0

TV

alpha

Process balanceController type = PID 2sided

Xp
Process balance =Symmetric

Xp Low
Process balance =Asymmetrict

0.0 to 1.0
Factory setting
0.3

Affects the additional damping filter of the D‐controller. The time constant is calculated from
α.Tv.

Selection• Symmetric• Asymmetric

Symmetric
There is only one control gain and this applies
for both sides of the process.

Factory setting
Symmetric

Asymmetric
You can set the control gain individually for bothsides of the process.

Range of adjustment andfactory setting dependingon the Source of data

Proportional band, reciprocal value of the
proportional gain Kp
As soon as controlled variable x deviates morethan xp from the set point w, manipulated
variable y reaches 100%.

Range of adjustment andfactory setting dependingon the Source of data

xp for y < 0 (manipulated variable < 0)

Xp Highxp for y > 0 (manipulated variable > 0)

Process balance =AsymmetricXn

Range of adjustment andfactory setting dependingon the Source of data

Tolerance range about the set point thatprevents minor oscillations about the set point if
using two-sided control loops.

XN Low

Range of adjustment andfactory setting dependingon the Source of data

xn for x < w (controlled variable < set point)

Process balance =Asymmetric
XN High

xn for x > w (controlled variable > set point)

Process balance =Asymmetric

112

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1 ... 2
Function
XHyst

Options

Info

0.0 to 99.9 %Width of the hysteresis range of the neutralzone, relative component of xn

Factory setting
0.0 %x hystyxne = w-x

The graphic illustrates the manipulated variable (with a pure P‐controller) over the control deviation e (setpoint minus controlled variable). Very low control deviations are set to zero. Control deviations > xn areprocessed "in the normal way". Via xhyst it is possible to configure a hysteresis to suppress oscillations at theedges.
Clock0.333 to 100.000 s
Factory setting
1.000 sMax y change rate

0.00 to 1.00
Factory setting
0.40

Exception behavior
Manipulated Variable

Expert setting
Only change the clock time of the controller if
you know exactly what you are doing.
Clock < Twu < 0.5(Tn + Tv)
Limits the change of the output variable
A value of 0.5 permits a maximum manipulated
variable change of 50 % within one second.
Hold=measured value is no longer reliable

Selection• Freeze• Fixed value
Factory setting
FreezeHow should the controller react to a measured
value that is no longer reliable?
FreezeThe manipulated variable is frozen at the current
value
Fixed value
Manipulated variable is set to 0 (no dosing)State

Hold as exception

Selection• Freeze• ResetInternal controller status

Factory setting
FreezeReset
After a hold, the control system starts fromscratch, and settling time takes place again.

Selection• All• None‣ Select: Should the hold trigger the previously

FreezeNo change

selected exception behaviour, or should it beignored?

Factory settingAll
Outputs

Goes to the menu Outputs →  83

Controller assignment viewShows an overview of the inputs and outputs
used

10.6.4

Cleaning programs

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.

Endress+Hauser

113

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Types of cleaning
The user can choose from the following cleaning types:• Standard clean• Chemoclean• Chemoclean Plus
State of cleaning: Indicates whether the cleaning program is active or not. This is for
information purposes only.
Selecting the cleaning type1.

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning: Select a cleaning program.
 You can configure 4 different types of cleaning which you can assign individuallyto the inputs.

2.

Cleaning type: For each cleaning program decide which type of cleaning should be
performed.

Standard cleaningStandard cleaning involves cleaning a sensor with compressed air as performed with theion-selective sensor CAS40D (connection of cleaning unit for →  43CAS40D) or rinsing
with water, for example.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Standard clean
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning time

5 to 600 s

Cleaning duration
The cleaning duration and interval aredependent on the process and sensor.

Factory setting
10 s‣ Determine the variables empirically or basedon experience.

‣ Define the cleaning cycle→  117.
Chemoclean
One example is the use of the CYR10B injector unit for cleaning sensors, e.g. with CYA112(CYR10B→  43 connection).
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Chemoclean
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning time

0 to 900 s

Cleaning duration

Factory setting
5s

114

Prerinse time

0 to 900 s

Postrinse time

Factory setting
0s

The cleaning duration, pre-rinse and post-rinse
times and the interval are dependent on theprocess and sensor. Determine the variables
empirically or based on experience.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Chemoclean Plus
One example is the use of the CYR10B injector unit in conjunction with Cleanfit Control
CYC25 for automated cleaning of 12 mm sensors in pneumatic retractable assemblies(CYC25 connection, see CYC25 Operating Instructions: BA01436C).
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Chemoclean Plus/Chemoclean Plus setup
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning steps setup

Table to create a time
program

You define a maximum of 30 program steps
which are to be performed one after the other.
For each step, enter the duration [s] and thestate (0 = "off", 1 = "on") of each relay or output.
You can specify the number and name of theoutputs further down in the menu.
See below for an example of programming.
Querying the switch status of the limit position
switch in the limit switch column:
When used with CYC25 with a retractableassembly connected, the following signal tableapplies:
CPA871/CPA875
Service

ES1 1
ES2 1

Measuring

ES1 0
ES2 0

CPA472D/CPA473/CPA474

Failsafe step setup

Table view

Service

ES1 1
ES2 0

Measuring

ES1 0
ES2 1

‣ In the table specify the states that the relays
or outputs should assume in the event of anerror.

Limit contacts

0 to 2‣ Select the number of digital input signals(e.g. from limit position switches of theretractable assembly). For querying the limit
position switches of a retractable assembly,
select 2.

Limit contact 1 ... 2

Outputs

Selection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals‣ Define the signal source for each limit

0 to 4‣ Select the number of outputs that actuators,

position switch.

When used with CYC25 with a retractableassembly connected:• Limit contact 1= DI x:1 (Service)• Limit contact 2= DI x:2 (Measuring)such as valves or pumps, should activate.

Output label 1 ... 4

User-defined text

You can assign a meaningful name to each
output, e.g. "assembly", "cleaner 1", "cleaner 2", etc.
When used with CYC25:• Output 1 = assembly (4/2-way pilot valve)• Output 2 = water (relay, e.g. CYR10B)• Output 3 = cleaner (relay, e.g. CYR10B)• Output 4 = optional valve (CYC25-AA relay or
CYC25-AB 3/2-way pilot valve)

The pneumatic retractable assembly, e.g. CPA87x, is activated by compressed air via a twoway valve. As a result, the assembly assumes either the "Measuring" position (sensor in
medium) or the "Service" position (sensor in rinse chamber). Media such as water orEndress+Hauser

115

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

cleaning agents are supplied via valves or pumps. Here there are two states: 0 (= "off" or"closed") and 1 (= "on" or "open").
Programming example: Regular cleaning with water and two cleaning agents
Step

Limit switch

Duration[s]

Assembly
CPA87xWater

Cleaner 1

Cleaner 2

1

ES1 1

5

1

1

0

0

2

ES2 1

5

1

1

0

0

3

0

30

1

1

0

0

4

0

5

1

1

1

0

5

0

60

1

0

0

0

6

0

30

1

1

0

0

7

0

5

1

1

0

1

8

0

60

1

0

0

0

9

0

30

1

1

0

0

10

ES1 0

5

0

1

0

0

11

ES2 0

5

0

1

0

0

12

0

5

0

0

0

0

Programming example: Regular cleaning with water, one cleaning agent and additional
valve on the rinse chamber outlet of the assembly (seal water)

116

Step

Limit switch

Duration[s]

Assembly
CPA87xWater

Cleaner

Valve

1

0

5

0

1

0

0

2

ES1 1

5

1

1

0

0

3

ES2 0

5

1

1

0

1

4

0

30

1

1

0

1

5

0

5

1

1

1

0

6

0

60

1

0

0

1

7

0

30

1

1

0

0

8

ES1 0

5

0

1

0

0

9

ES2 1

5

0

1

0

0

10

0

5

0

0

0

0

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Defining the cleaning cycle
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning cycle

Selection• Off• Interval• Weekly program‣ Choose from a cleaning routine that isrestarted at set intervals and a userdefinable weekly program.

Factory setting
Weekly program
Cleaning interval
Cleaning cycle = Interval

0-00:01 to 07-00:00(D-hh:mm)
Factory setting
1-00:00

Daily event times
Cleaning cycle = Weekly
programWeekdays
Cleaning cycle = Weekly
program

The interval value can be between 1 minute and7 days.
Example: You have set the value "1‐00:00". Eachday, the cleaning cycle starts at the same time
you started the first cleaning cycle.

00:00 to 23:59(HH:MM)

1.

Define up to 6 times (Event time 1 ... 6).
 You can then choose from these foreach day of the week.

Selection
Monday ... Sunday2.

Choose individually for each day of theweek which of the 6 times should be used
for a cleaning routine on this particularday.

This allows you to create weekly programs thatare perfectly adapted to suit your process.

Endress+Hauser

117

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Other settings and manual cleaning
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4
Function

Options

Info

Start signal

Selection• None• Fieldbus signals• Signals of digital or
analog inputs

In addition to cyclic cleaning, you can also use an
input signal to start event-controlled cleaning.

Factory setting
None

Hold

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Choose the trigger for such a cleaning
process here.

Interval and weekly programs are executed as
normal, which means that conflicts can arise.
Priority is given to the cleaning program thatwas the first to be started.

‣ Decide whether there should be a holdduring the cleaning process. This holdaffects the inputs to which this cleaning
process is assigned. Activate the cleaning
hold in the advanced setup for the sensor.

Factory setting
On
Start cyclic

ActionActivates the cyclical cleaning as set. Only visible
if Interval is selected under Cleaning cycle.

Start single

ActionStarts an individual cleaning process with theselected parameters. If cyclical cleaning isenabled, there are times in which it is notpossible to manually start the process.

Stop or Stop failsafe

ActionEnds the cleaning process (cyclical or manual)
Only visible if the program is running or if
Failsafe has happened.

Outputs

Switch to the Outputs →  83 menu
Assignment of the relay with Chemoclean Plus:• Relay x:1 - Cleaning x - Out1 or as assigned
in setup for Chemoclean Plus.
• Relay x:2 - Cleaning x - Out2 or as assigned
in setup for Chemoclean Plus.
• Relay x:3 - Cleaning x - Out3 or as assigned
in setup for Chemoclean Plus.
• Relay x:4 - Cleaning x - Out4 or as assigned
in setup for Chemoclean Plus.

Cleaning programassignment view

10.6.5Shows an overview of the assignment of inputs
and outputs in the cleaning program.

Mathematical functions

In addition to "real" process values, which are provided by connected physical sensors or
analog inputs, mathematical functions can be used to calculate a maximum of 8 "virtual"
process values.
The "virtual" process values can be:• Output via a current output or a fieldbus• Used as a controlled variable• Assigned as a measured variable to a limit switch• Used as a measured variable to trigger cleaning• Displayed in user-defined measuring menus
Difference
You can subtract the measured values of two sensors and use the result to detect incorrect
measurements, for example.

118

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

To calculate a difference, you must use two measured values with the same engineering
unit.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Difference
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Y1
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

Select the sensors and measured variables thatshould function as the minuend (Y1) or
subtrahend (Y2).

Read only

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.

Y2
Measured value
Difference value
Mathematical function
assignment view

Overview of the configured functions

Redundancy
Use this function to monitor two or three sensors with redundant measurements. The
arithmetic average of the two closest measured values is calculated and output as theredundancy value.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Redundancy
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Y1
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

You can select a maximum of 3 different types of
sensor that output the same measured value.
Example for temperature redundancy
You have a pH sensor and an oxygen sensor at
inputs 1 and 2. Select the pH sensor as Y1 andthe oxygen sensor as Y2. Measured value: SelectTemperature in each case.

Y2
Measured value
Y3 (optional)
Measured value
Deviation control

Selection
• Off
• On

You can monitor the redundancy. Specify an
absolute limit value that must not be exceeded.

Factory setting
Off
Deviation limit

Depends on the selected
measured value

Redundancy

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

Endress+Hauser

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

119

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

rH valueTo calculate the rH value, a pH sensor and an ORP sensor must be connected. It isirrelevant whether you are using a pH glass sensor, an ISFET sensor or the pH electrode ofan ISE sensor.
Instead of the mathematical functions, you can also connect a combined pH/ORP sensor.

‣ Set the main measured value simply to rH.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = rH calculation
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory settingOff
pH source

Connected pH sensor

ORP source

Connected ORP sensor

Calculated rH

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment viewSet the input for the pH sensor and the input for
the ORP sensor. Measured value querying isobsolete – you must select pH or ORP mV.
View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Degassed conductivity
Carbon dioxide from the air can be a contributing factor to the conductivity of a medium.
The degassed conductivity is the conductivity of the medium excluding the conductivity
caused by carbon dioxide.
Advantages of using degassed conductivity taking the example of a power station:• The conductivity caused by corrosion products or contamination in the feed water isdetermined as soon as the turbines are started. The system excludes the initially highconductivity values resulting from the ingress of air.
• If carbon dioxide is regarded as non-corrosive, the live steam can be directed to theturbine far earlier during startup.
• If the conductivity value increases during normal operation, it is possible to immediately
determine an ingress of coolant or air by calculating the degassed conductivity.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Degassed conductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Cation conductivity

Connected conductivity
sensorDegassed conductivity

Connected conductivity
sensorCO2 concentration

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

120

Cation conductivity represents the sensor
downstream from the cation exchanger andupstream from the "degassing module",
Degassed conductivity represents the sensor at
the outlet of the degassing module.
Measured value querying is obsolete – you can
only select conductivity.
View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Dual conductivity
You can subtract two conductivity values and use the result to monitor the efficiency of anion exchanger, for example.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Dual conductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Inlet
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

Select the sensors that should act as theminuend (Inlet, e.g. sensor upstream of the ion
exchanger) or subtrahend (Outlet, e.g. sensor
downstream of the ion exchanger).

Selection• Auto• #• #.#• #.##• #.###

Specify the number of decimal places.

OutletMeasured value
Main value format

Factory setting
AutoCond. unit

Selection• Auto• µS/cm• mS/cm• S/cm• µS/m• mS/m• S/mFactory setting
Auto

Dual conductivity
Mathematical function
assignment view

Endress+Hauser

Read only

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

121

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Calculated pH value
The pH value can be calculated from the measured values of two conductivity sensors
under certain conditions. Areas of application include power stations, steam generatorsand boiler feedwater.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = pH calculation fromconductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
MethodSelection• NaOH• NH3• LiOHThe calculation is performed on the basis of
Guideline VGB‐R‐450L of the Technical
Association of Large Power Plant Operators(Verband der Großkesselbetreiber, (VGB)).

Factory setting
NaOH

NaOH
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/273}
NH3
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/243}
LiOH
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/228}
κv ... Inlet ... direct conductivity
κh ... Outlet ... acid conductivity

Inlet
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

OutletInlet
Sensor upstream from the cation exchanger,"direct conductivity"
OutletSensor downstream from the cation exchanger,"acid conductivity"

Measured value

Selection of the measured value is obsolete as it
must always be Conductivity.
Calculated pH
Mathematical function
assignment view

Read only

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Cation exchanger capacity (optional, with activation code)
Cation exchangers are used to monitor the water/steam circuit for inorganic
contamination. The cation exchangers eliminate the disruptive influence of alkalizing
agents, such as ammonium hydroxide or caustic soda, which are added to the boiler
feedwater.
The service life of cation exchangers depends on:• The type of alkalizing agent• The concentration of the alkalizing agent• The amount of contamination in the medium• The capacity of the cation exchanger (efficiency of the resin)
To ensure the smooth operation of power stations, it is important to continuously monitor
the exchange column load. When a user-defined remaining capacity is reached, thetransmitter displays a diagnostic message so that the ion exchange column can be replacedor regenerated in good time.

122

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

The calculation of the remaining capacity depends on the following factors:• Flow rate
• Volume of the exchanger• Salinity of the water at the exchanger inlet• Total volume capacity of the resin• Degree of efficiency of the exchanger
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Cation exchanger capacity
Function

Options

Cond IEX output

Read only

Info

Cond IEX input
Flow rate
Remaining capacity
Remaining op. time
Time until %0B 1)
Configuration
Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Unit of volume

Selection• l• gal
Factory settinglExchanger volume

TVC resin

0.0 to 99999
Factory setting
0.0Volume of the cation exchanger
Unit depending on the option selected in Unit ofvolume0.0 to 99999 eq/l or
eq/gal

TVC = total volume capacity
Unit as equivalent per Unit of volume

Factory setting
0.0 eq/l
Resin efficiency

1.0 to 100.0%
Factory setting
100.0%

Set remaining capacity

Selection
• Yes
• No
Factory settingNo

Remaining capacity

0.0 to 100.0%

Set remaining capacity = Yes

Factory setting
0.0%

Warning limit

1.0 to 100.0%
Factory setting
20.0%

Endress+Hauser

For information on the resin efficiency, refer tothe data provided by the manufacturer of theresin used.
Before you start monitoring, specify theremaining capacity of the exchanger resin.
This value makes allowances for the re-use ofresin that has already been used.
If no value is entered manually, 100% is used as
the initial value for calculating the current
remaining capacity.

Specify the remaining capacity at which thetransmitter should display a diagnostic message.

123

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Cation exchanger capacity
Function

Options

Info

Cond IEX input

Connected conductivity
sensor

Select the conductivity sensor upstream from theinlet of the exchanger column.

Cond IEX output

Connected conductivity
sensor

Select the conductivity sensor downstream fromthe outlet of the exchanger column.

Max cond at IEX output

0.0 to 99999 µS/cm
Factory setting
0.0 µS/cm

Here, enter the maximum value that the acidconductivity may have at the outlet of the cationexchanger.
The transmitter displays a diagnostic message if
this value is exceeded.

Selection• Source value• Fixed value

Source value
You have connected the measured value of aflowmeter via a current input or a binary input.

Factory setting
Source value

Fixed value
Manual entry of a fixed flow rate

Selection• None• Current inputs• Binary inputs

Specify the input at which you have connected
and configured the measured value of aflowmeter (Menu/Setup/Inputs).

Flow rate type

Flow rate

Factory setting
None
Fixed value

User-defined text

Flow rate type = Fixed value
Min flow rate

0.0 to 99999 l/h

Max flow rate

Factory setting
0.0 l/hMathematical function
assignment view
1)

Specify the fixed flow value which you have readon an external flowmeter, for example.

Overview of the configured functions%0B is a variable whose value depends on the configuration. The configured value is displayed, e.g. 20%.

Combined chlorine
This function calculates the concentration of combined chlorine in the medium. This
calculation involves subtracting the free chlorine concentration from the total chlorine

124

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

concentration. This requires both a sensor for free chlorine CCS51E and a sensor for total
chlorine CCS53E.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode /Combined chlorine
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
OffFree chlorine

Selection
Channels to which a sensor
for free chlorine isconnected
Factory setting---

Total chlorine

Selection
Channels to which a sensor
for total chlorine isconnected
Factory setting
---

Unit

Selection• mg/l• µg/l• ppm• ppb
Factory setting
mg/lFormatSelection• #.###• #.##• #.#• #Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.###
Combined chlorine

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

Current, calculated value
Overview of the configured functions

Formula (optional, with activation code)
With the formula editor, it is possible to calculate a new value from a maximum of 3
measured values. A wide range of mathematical and logical (Boolean) operations areavailable for this purpose.
The Liquiline firmware offers you a powerful mathematics tool with the formula
editor. You are responsible for the feasibility of your formula, and therefore for thefeasibility of the result.

Endress+Hauser

SymbolOperation

Type of operands

Type of result

Example+Addition

Numerical

Numerical

A+2-

Subtraction

Numerical

Numerical

100-B

*

Multiplication

Numerical

Numerical

A*C/

Division

Numerical

Numerical

B/100

^

Power

Numerical

Numerical

A^5²

SquareNumerical

Numerical

A²

125

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

SymbolOperation

Type of operands

Type of result

Example³

Cube

Numerical

Numerical

B³

SIN

Sine

Numerical

Numerical

SIN(A)COS

CosineNumerical

Numerical

COS(B)

EXP

Exponential function ex

Numerical

Numerical

EXP(A)

LN

Natural logarithm

Numerical

Numerical

LN(B)

LOG

Decadic logarithm

Numerical

Numerical

LOG(A)MAX

Maximum of two values

Numerical

Numerical

MAX(A,B)

MIN

Minimum of two values

Numerical

Numerical

MIN(20,B)

MOD

Division with remainder

Numerical

Numerical

MOD (10,3)ABS

Absolute value

Numerical

Numerical

ABS(C)NUM

Boolean → numerical conversion

BooleanNumerical

NUM(A)=

EqualsBooleanBoolean

A=B<>

Not equal to

BooleanBoolean

A<>B>

Greater than

Numerical

Boolean

B>5.6<

Less than

Numerical

Boolean

A<C

OR

Disjunction

BooleanBoolean

B OR CAND

Conjunction

BooleanBoolean

A AND BXOR

Exclusive disjunction

BooleanBoolean

B XOR CNOT

Negation

BooleanBoolean

NOT A

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Formula
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Source A ... C

Selection
Select source
Factory setting
None

126

You can use all the sensor inputs, binary andanalog inputs, mathematical functions, limit
switches, time switches, fieldbus signals,
controllers and datasets for measuring range
switching as the source for measured values.

Measured value

Selection
Depends on the source

1.

Choose a maximum of three sources (A, B
and C) for measured values.

A ... CThe current measured
value is displayed2.

For each source, choose the measured
value to be calculated.
 All available signals - depending on
the selected source - are possible
measured values.

3.

Enter the formula.

4.

Switch on the calculation.
 The current measured values A, B
and C as well as the result of thecalculation using the formula aredisplayed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Formula
Function

Options

Info

FormulaUser-defined text

Table →  125
Make sure the exact notation is used (uppercase). Blank spaces before and after
mathematical characters are irrelevant.
Note the operator precedence, i.e.
multiplication and division takeprecedence over addition and subtraction.
Use parentheses if necessary.

Result unit

User-defined text

You may enter a unit for the calculated value if
desired.

Result format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###• #.####

Select the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.##
Result numericRead only

Mathematical function
assignment view

Current, calculated value
Overview of the configured functions

Example: 2-point chlorine regulator with volume flow monitoring
A relay output activates a dosing pump. The pump should switch on when the following 3
conditions are met:
• (1) There is flow
• (2) The volume flow is above a defined value• (3) The concentration of chlorine drops below a defined value
1.

Connect a binary input signal from an "INS" point level switch of the CCA250
assembly to the DIO module.

2.

Connect an analog input signal of a volume flow meter to the AI module.

3.

Connect the chlorine sensor.

4.

Configure the Formula mathematical function: Source A = binary input DIO, Source
B = current input AI, Source C = input Disinfection.
 Formula:
A AND (B > 3) AND (C < 0.9)
(where 3 is the lower limit value of the volume flow and 0.9 is the lower limit
value of the chlorine concentration)

5.

Configure the relay output with the Formula mathematical function and connect thedosing pump to the corresponding relay.

The pump is switched on if all 3 conditions are met. If one of the conditions is no longer
met, the pump is switched off again.
 Instead of outputting the result of the formula directly to a relay, you can also connect alimit switch in between in order to attenuate the output signal via a switch-on and switchoff delay.
Example: Load-based control
The load – i.e. the product of the concentration and volume flow – is needed for the dosage
of precipitants, for instance.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Connect the input signal of a phosphate analyzer to the AI module.

2.

Connect an analog input signal of a volume flow meter to the AI module.
127

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

3.

Configure the Formula mathematical function: Source A = input signal phosphateand Source B = input signal volume flow.
 Formula:
A*B*x(where x is an application-specific proportionality factor)

4.

Select this formula as the source e.g. of the current output or of a modulated binary
output.

5.

Connect the valve or pump.

10.6.6

Measuring range switching

A measuring range switching (MRS) configuration includes the following options for eachof the four binary input states:• Operating mode (conductivity or concentration)• Concentration table• Temperature compensation• Current output turndown• Limit switch range
An MRS set is assigned to a channel and switched on. The measuring range configuration
selected via the binary inputs is now applied instead of the normal configuration of thelinked sensor channel. For current outputs and limit switches to be controlled by the MRS,
they must be linked to the MRS set, not to the measuring channel.
Current outputs and limit switches can be linked to an MRS set. This MRS set gives you themeasured value and the associated turn down (current outputs) or the range for limit
value monitoring (limit switches).
A limit switch connected to an MRS set always uses the Out of range checkmode.
Consequently, it switches when the value is outside the configured range.
If a current output or limit switch is connected to an MRS set, the turndown, monitoring
range and limit switch mode can no longer be configured manually. Therefore, these
options are hidden in the menus (current outputs and limit switch).
Programming example: CIP cleaning in a brewery
Beer

Water

AlkaliAcid

Binary input 1

0

0

1

1

Binary input 1

0

1

0

1

Measuring
range 00

Measuring
range 01

Measuring
range 10

Measuring
range 11

Operating mode

Conductivity

Conductivity

Concentration

Concentration

Conc. table--

NaOH 0..15%

User table 1

Compensation

User table 1

Linear--Range lower value

1.00 mS/cm

0.1 mS/cm

0.50 %

0.50 %

Range upper value

3.00 mS/cm

0.8 mS/cm

5.00 %

1.50 %

Range lower value

2.3 mS/cm

0.5 mS/cm

2.00 %

1.30 %

Range upper value

2.5 mS/cm

0.7 mS/cm

2.10 %

1.40 %

Current output

Limit switches

128

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Measuring range switch
Function

Options

MRS set 1 ... 2

MRS

Info
If you enter both activation codes, you have two
independent parameter sets available formeasuring range switching. The submenus are
the same for both sets.

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Sensor

Selection• None• Connected conductivity
sensors

This function can be used on conductivity
sensors only.

Factory setting
None
Binary input 1 ... 2

Selection• None• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals• Limit switches

Source of the switching signal, can be selected
for input 1 and 2 in each case

Factory setting
None
Measuring range 00 ...
11
Operating mode

Select the MRSs; a maximum of 4 are possible.
The submenus are identical for each and thus
are displayed only once.
Selection• Conductivity• Concentration• TDS• Resistance
Factory setting
Conductivity

Conc. table
Operating mode =Concentration

Selection• NaOH 0..15%• NaOH 25..50%• HCl 0..20%• HNO3 0..24%• HNO3 24..30%• H2SO4 0.5..27%• H2SO4 93..99%• H3PO4 0..40%• NaCl 0..26%• User table 1 ... 4

Selection depends on the sensor used:• Inductive sensor and conductive four-pin
sensor• Conductivity• Concentration• TDS• Conductive sensor• Conductivity• Resistance• TDS
Concentration tables saved at the factory:• NaOH: 0 to 15%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• NaOH: 25 to 50%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• HCl: 0 to 20%, 0 to 65 °C (32 to 149 °F)• HNO3: 0 to 25%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• H2SO4: 0 to 28%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• H2SO4: 40 to 80%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• H2SO4: 93 to 100%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212°F)• H3PO4: 0 to 40%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• NaCl: 0 to 26%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)

Factory setting
NaOH 0..15%
Compensation
Operating mode =Conductivity

Selection• None• Linear• NaCl (IEC 746-3)• Water ISO7888 (20°C)• Water ISO7888 (25°C)• UPW NaCl
• UPW HCl
• User table 1 ... 4

Various methods are available to compensate forthe temperature dependency. Depending on yourprocess, decide which type of compensation you
want to use. Alternatively, you can also selectNone and thus measure uncompensatedconductivity.

Factory setting
LinearEndress+Hauser

129

Operation

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Measuring range switch
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the Operating
mode

Units are only queried for Operating mode =Conductivity . The other units are pre-definedand cannot be modified.
• Conductivity
S/m, mS/cm, µS/cm, S/cm, µS/m, mS/m
• Concentration
%
• TDS
ppm
• ResistanceΩcm

Depends on the Operating
mode

Units are only queried for Operating mode =Conductivity . The other units are pre-definedand cannot be modified.
• Conductivity
S/m, mS/cm, µS/cm, S/cm, µS/m, mS/m
• Concentration
%
• TDS
ppm
• ResistanceΩcm

Current output
Range lower unit
Range lower value
Range upper unit
Range upper value

Limit switches
Range lower unit
Range lower value
Range upper unit
Range upper value

10.6.7

Diagnostic modules

Here you can configure a maximum of 8 individual diagnostic messages.
A diagnostic module has the following properties:• The feed source can be configured like a binary output (relay, digital output).
• You can choose whether the diagnostic message should be output at a high level or low
level.
• You decide which error category (Namur class) should be assigned to the message.
• You can define a customized text to be output as the diagnostic message text.
In addition you can switch off the factory diagnostic code for limit switches. This allows
you to:• Use the limit switch on a purely functional basis (without a message)• Configure application-specific message texts• Control diagnostic modules directly by a digital signal or via a limit switch output(enables the use of switch-on/switch-off delay, for example).
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Diagnostic modules
Function

Options

Info

Selection• None• Fieldbus signals• Binary inputs• Limit switch

Specify the input which should be the source ofdata for the diagnostic message.

Diagnostic module 1 (961) ...
8 (968)Source of data

Factory setting
None
Measured value

130

Selection
Specify the measured value that should trigger
Depends on Source of data the diagnostic message.
You can use different measured values
Factory setting
depending on the data source. →  99
None

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Diagnostic modules
Function
Active low

Options

Info

Selection
• Off
• On

On: The output value is equal to the inverse
output value.

Factory setting
On
Short text
Diagnostic module
assignment view

Endress+Hauser

User-defined text

Give the diagnostic message a name.
Shows an overview of the diagnostic modules
used.

131

Calibration

Liquiline CM44P

11

Calibration• Sensors with Memosens protocol are calibrated at the factory.
• Users must decide whether the process conditions present require calibration duringinitial commissioning.
• Additional calibration is not required in many standard applications.

‣ Calibrate sensors at sensible intervals depending on the process.
Operating Instructions "Memosens", BA01245C

11.1

Calibration instructions

Calibration(according to DIN 1319)
A calibration is defined as an operation to establish the relationship between themeasured value or expected value of the output variable and the related true or correct
value of the measured variable (input variable) for a measuring system under specified
conditions.
A calibration does not alter the performance of the measuring device.
Adjustment
An adjustment corrects the value displayed by a measuring device, in other words themeasured/displayed value (the actual value) is corrected so that the reading agrees withthe correct, set value.
The value determined during calibration is used to calculate the correct measured value
and saved in the sensor.

11.2

CAL menu

11.2.1

Take reference spectrum

1.

CAL/CH..x:y Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Take reference spectrum.

2.

Reference spectrum (zero solution)
 Do you want to start the calibration?
(Hold turns to active)

3.

Clean the measuring gap and put the sensor in zero solution.

4.

OK Lamp spectrum is recorded.

Following calibration, clean the sensor again and insert it back into the process.

132

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Calibration

11.2.2

Application calibration

Menu settings
CAL/CH..x:y Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Application calibration
Function

Options

Info

DatasetOptions
Dataset 1 ... 50

Select the dataset.

Default setting
Dataset 1
Package

Optionscolor

Measuring package for color measurement

Default setting
color
Parameter

Options
• L*
• a*
• b*
Default setting
L*

Unit

none

Calibration table

Calibration curve
Edit factor

No unit in "Lab" color space
Application table
Application adjustment whereby L*, a* or b* is
assigned a different value.

Display only
Display• Dataset name• Parameter name1.

Cal. factor

2.

Enter the new factor.

3.
Edit offset

Display• Dataset name• Parameter name1.

Offset2.

Enter the new offset.

3.

Endress+Hauser

Accept calibration data

Accept calibration data133

Calibration

Liquiline CM44P

11.2.3Temperature

Menu settings
CAL/CH..x:y Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Temperature
Function
Edit offset

Start calibration

134

Options

Info

ActionThe current offset is displayed.
1.

Enter the new offset [K].

2.

Accept calibration data The new offset is used.

1.

CAL/CH..x:y Spectrometer/
Spectrometer/Temperature/ Start
calibration.
 Do you want to start the calibration?
(Hold turns to active)

2.

OK.

3.

Place the sensor in the calibration
medium. OK.
 The new actual value is displayed.

4.

Enter the reference temperature. Next.
 The current and new offset are
displayed.

5.

Adopt calibration data.

6.

Clean the sensor and place it in theprocess medium. OK.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

12

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

The transmitter continuously monitors its functions itself.
If a diagnostic message occurs, the display alternates between the diagnostic message andthe measured value in the measuring mode.
The color of the display background changes to red if a diagnostic message for error
category "F" occurs.

12.1.1

Troubleshooting

A diagnostic message appears on the display or via the fieldbus , measured values are notplausible, or you identify a fault.
1.

See the Diagnostics menu for details on the diagnostic message.
 Follow the instructions to rectify the problem.

2.

If this does not help, search for the diagnostic message under "Overview of diagnostic
information" in these Operating Instructions. Use the message number as a search
criterion. Ignore the letters indicating the NAMUR error category.
 Follow the troubleshooting instructions provided in the last column of the error
tables.

3.

If the measured values are implausible, the local display is faulty or you encounter
other problems, search for the faults under "Process errors without messages" (→Operating Instructions Memosens, BA01245C) or "Device-specific errors" (→  138).
 Follow the recommended measures.

4.

Contact the Service Department if you cannot rectify the error yourself, citing only
the error number.

12.1.2

Process errors without messages

Operating Instructions "Memosens", BA01245C

12.1.3

Device-specific errors

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Dark display

No supply voltage‣ Check if supply voltage applied.

Display connector
plugged in incorrectly‣ Check. Must be in RJ45 socket on base module.

Base module defective‣ Replace base module.

Values appear on display but: Module not wired• Display does not change
correctly
and/or• Device cannot be operated Impermissible operating
system condition‣ Check modules and wiring.

Implausible measured values‣ First perform tests and take measures as

Inputs defective‣ Switch off device and switch it on again.

outlined in "Process-specific errors" section.

Measuring input test:‣ Connect the Memocheck Sim CYP03D to the
input and use it to check the function of the
input.

Endress+Hauser

135Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Current output, incorrect
current value

Incorrect adjustment‣ Check with integrated current simulation,

Load too large

connect mA meter directly to current output.

Shunt/short to ground incurrent loop
No current output signal

Base module defective‣ Check with integrated current simulation,connect mA meter directly to current output.

12.2

Diagnostic information on local display

Up-to-date diagnostic events are displayed along with their status category, diagnostic
code and short text. Clicking on the navigator lets you retrieve more information and tips
on remedial measures.

12.3

Diagnostic information via web browser

The same diagnostic information that is available for the local display is available via theweb server.

12.4

Diagnostic information via fieldbus

Diagnostic events, status signals and more information are transmitted according to thedefinitions and technical capability of the respective fieldbus systems.

12.5

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.5.1

Classification of diagnostic messages

In the DIAG/Diagnostics list menu, you can find more detailed information on the current
diagnostic messages displayed.
In accordance with NAMUR specification NE 107, the diagnostic messages arecharacterized by:• Message number• Error category (letter in front of the message number)• F = (Failure) a malfunction has been detected
The measured value of the affected channel is no longer reliable. The cause of themalfunction is to be found in the measuring point. Any controller connected should be
set to manual mode.
• C = (Function check), (no error)
Maintenance work is being performed on the device. Wait until the work has been
completed.
• S = (Out of specification), the measuring point is being operated outside its
specification
Operation is still possible. However, you run the risk of increased wear, a shorter
operating life or lower accuracy levels. The cause of the problem is to be found outside
the measuring point.
• M = Maintenance required. Action must be taken as soon as possible
The device still measures correctly. Immediate measures are not necessary. However,proper maintenance efforts would prevent a possible malfunction in the future.
• Message text
If you contact the Service Department, please cite the message number only. Since you
can individually change the assignment of an error to an error category, the Service
Department cannot use this information.
136

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

12.5.2

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

All the diagnostic messages are assigned to specific error categories at the factory. Sinceother settings might be preferred depending on the application, error categories and theeffect errors have on the measuring point can be configured individually. Furthermore,
every diagnostic message can be disabled.
ExampleDiagnostic message 531 Logbook fullappears on the display. You want to change thismessage so that an error is not shown on the display for example.
1.

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior .

2.

Select the diagnostics message and press the navigator button.

3.

Decide: (a) Should the message be deactivated? (Diagnostics message = Off)(b) Do you want to change the error category?(Status signal)(c) Should an error current be output? (Failure current = On)(d) Do you want to trigger a cleaning program? (Cleaning program)

4.

Example: You deactivate the message.
 The message is no longer displayed. In the DIAG menu, the message appears as
Past message.

Possible settings
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/Run the ../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed.

List of diagnostic messages

Only then can you make the settings for thismessage.
Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code

Failure current

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code

Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)You can deactivate or reactivate a diagnostic
message here.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No error current at the current output
Decide whether an error current should be
output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.
In the event of general device errors, the error
current is switched to all the current outputs. In
the event of channel-specific errors, the error
current is only switched to the current output inquestion.
The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.
Decide whether you want to change a status
signal assignment for your application.

Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code

Endress+Hauser

137

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

Menu/Setup/Run the ../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior
Function
Diag. output

Options

Info

Selection• None• Binary outputs• Alarm relay• Relay

You can use this function to select an output towhich the diagnostic message should be
assigned.
alarm relay is always available, An
regardless of the device version. Other

Factory setting
None

Cleaning program

relays are optional.
Before you can assign the message to an output:
Configure one of the output types mentioned asfollows:
Menu/Setup/Outputs/(Alarm relay or Binary
output or relay)/Function = Diagnostics andOperating mode = as assigned.

Selection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4

Decide whether the diagnostic message should
trigger a cleaning program.
You can define cleaning programs under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

Read only

12.6

Overview of diagnostic information

12.6.1

Device-specific, general diagnostic messages

No.

Message

Factory settings
S

1)

D

2)

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

202

Selftest active

F

On

Off

Wait for self-test to be finished

216

Hold active

C

On

Off

Output values and status of the channel are on
hold

241

Firmware failure

F

On

On

Internal device error

242

Firmware incomp.

F

On

On

1.

Update the software.

243

Firmware failure

F

On

On

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

3.

Replace the backplane (Endress+Hauser
Service).

261

262

263

284

138

Here you can find more information on the
diagnostic message and instructions on how toresolve the problem.

Electronics module

Module connection

Incomp. detected

Firmware update

F

F

F

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Electronics module defective
1.

Replace the module.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Electronics module not communicating
1.

Check the module , replace it if necessary.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Wrong type of electronics module1.

Replace the module.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Update completed successfully

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S

285

302

Update error

Battery low

1)

F

M

D

2)

On

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

Off

Firmware update failed
1.

Repeat.

2.

SD card error → use another card.

3.

Incorrect firmware → repeat with suitable
firmware.

4.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Buffer battery of real time clock is low
The date and time are lost if the power isinterrupted.

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service (battery
replacement).

304

305

306

Module data

Power consumption

Software error

F

F

F

On

On

On

On

On

On

At least 1 module has incorrect configuration data
1.

Check the system information.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Total power consumption too high1.

Check installation.

2.

Remove sensors/modules.

Internal firmware error‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
366

Module connection

F

On

On

No communication with the actuator module‣ Check the internal connecting cable to the 1IF
module.

370

373

Internal voltage

Electronictemp. high

F

M

On

On

On

Off

Internal voltage outside the valid range
1.

Check supply voltage.

2.

Check inputs and outputs for shortcircuiting.

High electronics temperature‣ Check ambient temperature and energy
consumption.

374

Sensor check

F

On

Off

No measurement signal from sensor
1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Check the sensor, replace it if necessary.

401

Factory reset

F

On

On

Factory reset is performed

403

Device verification

M

Off

Off

Device verification active, please wait

405

Service IP active

C

Off

Off

Endress+Hauser Service switch is switched on
The device can be addressed at 192.168.1.212.

‣ Switch off the service switch to change to the
saved IP settings.

Endress+Hauser

406

Param. active

C

Off

Off

‣ Wait for configuration to be finished.

407

Diag. setup active

C

Off

Off

‣ Wait for maintenance to be finished.

412

Writing backup

F

On

Off

‣ Wait for the write process to be finished

413

Reading backup

F

On

Off

‣ Wait.

139

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

Message

Factory settings
S

436

437

438

455

SD card (80%)

SD card (100%)

SD card removed

Mathemat. function

1)

M

M

M

F

D

2)

On

On

On

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

Off

Off

Off

On

460

Output below limit

S

On

Off

461

Output above limit

S

On

Off

SD card 80% full
1.

Replace SD card with empty card.

2.

Clear SD card.

3.

Set logbook properties to ring buffer(Setup/General settings/Logbooks).

SD card 100% full. No longer possible to write to
the card.
1.

Replace SD card with empty card.

2.

Clear SD card.

3.

Set logbook properties to ring buffer(Setup/General settings/Logbooks).

SD card not plugged in1.

Check SD card.

2.

Replace SD card.

3.

Disable logging.

Mathematical function: fault condition
1.

Check mathematical function.

2.

Check assigned input variables.

Reasons• Sensor in air• Air pockets in assembly• Sensor fouled• Incorrect flow to sensor
1.

Check sensor installation.

2.

Clean the sensor.

3.

Change assignment of current outputs.

502

No text catalog

F

On

On

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

503

Language change

M

On

Off

Language change failed‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
529

Diag. setup active

C

Off

Off

‣ Wait for maintenance to be finished.

530

Logbook at 80%

M

On

Off

1.

531

Logbook full

M

On

Off

Save the logbook to the SD card and thendelete the logbook in the device.

2.

Set memory to circular buffer.

3.

Deactivate logbook.

532

License error

M

On

Off

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

540

Parameter save fail

M

On

Off

Storage of configuration has failed‣ Repeat.
541

Parameter load ok

M

On

Off

542

Parameter load fail

M

On

Off

Configuration successfully loaded
Loading of configuration has failed‣ Repeat.

140

543

Parameter load abort

M

On

Off

Configuration loading aborted

544

Parameter reset ok

M

On

Off

Factory default successful

545

Parameter reset fail

M

On

Off

Setting of device configuration to factory setting
has failed

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S

583

906

907

SD card write protected

Cat.exchanger failure

Cat.exchanger warning

1)

M

F

S

D

2)

On

On

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

Off

Off

Off

SD card write-protected. Not possible to write to
the card.
1.

Remove the write protection from the SD
card.

2.

Replace the SD card with an SD card that
does not have write protection.

3.

Set logbook properties to ring buffer(Setup/General settings/Logbooks).

Invalid values for conductivity or flow
1.

Check for valid measured values in themenu of the mathematical function.

2.

Check sensors.

3.

Check minimum flow.

Limit values exceeded for conductivity or flow.
Possible reasons:• Resin depleted• Blocked pipe

‣ Check application.
908

IEX capacity low

M

On

Off

The capacity of the exchange resin will soon be
exhausted.

‣ Schedule resin regeneration or replacement.
909

IEX capacity exhausted

F

On

Off

The capacity of the exchange resin is exhausted.

‣ Regenerate or replace the resin.
910

Limit switch

S

On

Off

Limit switch activated937

Controlled variable

S

On

Off

Controller input warning
Status of the controller variable is not OK‣ Check application.
938

Controller setpoint

S

On

Off

Controller input warning
Status of set point is not OK‣ Check application.
939

Control. disturbance

S

On

Off

Controller input warning
Status of disturbance variable is not OK‣ Check application.
951 - Hold active CH1 ..
958

C

On

Off

Output values and status of the channels are on
hold.

‣ Wait until the hold is deactivated.
961 - Diagnostic module 1
968 (961)...
Diagnostic module 8
(968)

S

Off

Off

Diagnostic module is enabled969

Modbus Watchdog

S

Off

Off

The device did not receive a Modbus telegram
from the master within the specified time. The
status of received Modbus process values is set toinvalid970

Curr. input overload

S

On

On

Current input overloaded
The current input is switched off at 23 mA andabove due to overload and reactivatedautomatically when a normal load is present.

971

Current Input low

S

On

On

Current input too low
At 4 to 20 mA, the input current is less than thelower fault current.

‣ Check the input for short-circuit.

Endress+Hauser

141

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

Message

Factory settings
S

1)

D

2)

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

972

Curr. input > 20 mA

S

On

On

Output current above current output range

973

Current Input < 4 mA

S

On

On

Output current below current output range

974

Diagnostics confirm.

C

Off

Off

User has acknowledged the message displayed in
the measuring menu.

975

Device restart

C

Off

Off

Device reset

976

PFM/PWM value high

S

On

Off

977

PFM/PWM value low

S

On

Off

Pulse frequency modulation: Measured value
above/below the specified output signal range.
• Sensor in air• Air pockets in assembly• Incorrect flow to sensor• Sensor fouled

978

Chemoclean Failsafe

S

On

On

1.

Clean the sensor

2.

Check plausibility.

3.

Adjust the PFM configuration.

No feedback signal detected within the configured
period.
1.

Check application.

2.

Check wiring.

3.

Extend the duration.

4.

Carry out active reset of Failsafe. Path:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/CleaningICleaning x/Stop failsafe

990

Deviation limit

F

On

On

Redundancy: Percentage deviation value above
limit value991

CO2 conc. range

F

On

On

CO2 concentration (degassed conductivity) outside
the measuring range992

pH calculation range

F

On

On

pH calculation outside the measuring range993

rH calculation range

F

On

On

rH calculation outside the measuring range

994

Difference conduct.

F

On

On

Dual conductivity outside the measuring range

1)
2)
3)

Status signal
Diagnostic message
Failure current

12.6.2

Sensor-specific diagnostic messages

The following abbreviations for the various sensor types are used in the table:• P ... pH/ORP (general, applies for all pH sensors)• P (glass) ... only applies for glass electrodes• P (ISFET) ... only applies for ISFET sensors• C ... conductivity (general, applies for all conductivity sensors)• C (cond.) ... only applies for sensors with conductive measurement of conductivity• C (ind.) ... only applies for sensors with inductive measurement of conductivity• O ... oxygen (general, applies for all oxygen sensors)• O (opt.) ... only applies for optical oxygen sensors• O (amp.) ... only applies for amperometric oxygen sensors• N ... nitrate sensors• T ... turbidity and solids sensors• S ... SAC sensors• U ... interface sensors• I ... ion-selective sensors• DI ... disinfection sensors

142

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting• SC ... spectrometer for water analysis• FL ... sensors for fluorescence measurement• Spc ... spectrometer
No.

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action‣ Replace sensor.

002

Sensor unknown

F

On

On

All

004

Sensor defective

F

On

On

All

005

Sensor data invalid

F

On

On

All

1.

Check the firmware compatibilityof the sensor and transmitter orload suitable firmware

2.

Set the sensor to the factory
settings, disconnect the sensor
and reconnect it.

3.

Update transmitter data

4.

Replace sensor.

010

Sensor scanning

F

Off

On

All

‣ Wait for initialization to be finished.

012

Writing data failed

F

On

On

All

1.

Repeat write process.

2.

Replace sensor.

013

018

022

061

Sensor type wrong

Sensor not readyF

F

Temperature
sensorF

Sensor electronic

F

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

All

All

Sensor does not suit the device
configuration or device configurationmust be changed to new type of sensor
1.

Change to a sensor of the typethat is configured.

2.

Adapt the device configuration to
the connected sensor.

Sensor communication blocked
1.

Sensor fails tag check. Replace.

2.

Internal software error. Contact
the Service Department.

P, C, O, I,
DI, SC, FL

Temperature sensor defective

All

Sensor electronics defective‣ Replace sensor.
‣ Replace sensor.

062

Sensor connection

F

On

On

All

1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Contact Service Department.

081

Initialization

F

On

On

All

‣ Wait for initialization to be finished.

100

Sensorcommunication

F

On

On

All

Sensor not communicating

101

102

Sensorincompatible

Calibration timer

F

M

On

On

On

Off

All

All except
SC, FL

1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Check sensor connector.

3.

Contact Service Department.

1.

Update sensor firmware

2.

Replace sensor.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Calibration interval elapsed.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
103

Calibration timer

M

On

Off

All except
SC, FL

Calibration interval will elapse soon.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.

Endress+Hauser

143

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

104

Message

Calibration validity

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial actionAll

Last calibration no longer valid.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
105

Calibration validity

M

On

Off

All

Last calibration will lose its validity soon.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
106

Sensor TAG

F

On

On

All

Sensor has invalid tag or tag group107

Calibration active

C

On

Off

P, C, O, I,
DI‣ Wait for calibration to be finished.

108

SIP, CIP,
autoclaving

M

On

Off

P, C, OSpecified number of sterilizations willsoon be reached. Measurement can stilltake place.

‣ Replace sensor.
109

SIP, CIP, autoclav
cap

M

On

Off

O (amp.)Specified number of sterilizations for thecap is reached. Measurement can stilltake place.

‣ Replace membrane cap.
110

Init. channel

F

On

On

All except
SC

Channel initialization has failed.
Measuring operation not possible.

‣ Contact Service Department.
111

Operating time cap

M

On

Off

DI

Hours of operation monitoring
The limit set for the total hours ofoperation for the cap has been reached.
Measurement can still take place.

113

144

Incompatible filter

F

On

On

O (opt)1.

Replace the cap.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

Incompatible filter setting in the sensor
1.

Switch to valid measurement filter(sensor settings).

2.

Update the device firmware.

3.

Contact Service Department.

114

Temp.offset high

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Calibration alarm: Limit values fortemperature offset exceeded

115

Temp. offset low

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

1.

Check temperature sensor.

2.

Replace sensor.

116

Temp. slope high

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Calibration alarm: Limit values fortemperature slope exceeded

117

Temp. slope low

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Sensor old or defective

118

Sensor glass break.

F

On

Off

P (glass)

119

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

1.

Repeat calibration.

2.

Replace sensor.

Glass breakage warning, impedance ofpH glass too low
Measuring can continue until the alarm(118) occurs.
1.

Inspect sensor for hair-line cracks
and breakage.

2.

Check medium temperature.

3.

Replace sensor.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

Reference warning, impedance ofreference too low

120

Sensor reference

F

On

Off

P (glass)

121

Sensor reference

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Measuring can continue until the alarm(120) occurs.
1.

Check reference for clogging/
contamination.

2.

Clean reference/junction.

3.

Replace sensor.

122

Sensor glass

F

On

Off

P (glass)

123

Sensor glass

M

On

On

P (glass)

124

Sensor glass

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Measuring can continue until the alarm(122, 124) occurs.

125

Sensor glass

F

On

Off

P (glass)

1.

Inspect sensor for hair-line cracks
and breakage.

2.

Check or change limit values.

3.

Replace sensor.

126

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Impedance limit values exceeded/
undershot

Sensor condition check (SCC), poor
sensor condition
Glass membrane fouled or dry, junction
blocked1.

Clean sensor, regenerate2.

Replace sensor.

127

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Sensor condition check (SCC), adequate
sensor condition

128

Sensor leakage

F

On

Off

P (ISFET),O (amp.),DI

Leak current alarm
Defective due to abrasion or damage
Damage to the gate (only ISFET)‣ Replace sensor.
129

Sensor leakage

F

On

Off

P (ISFET),O (amp.),DI

Leak current warning
Measuring can continue until the alarm
occurs130

Sensor supply

F

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

Poor sensor power supply

131

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

O (opt.)132

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

O (opt.)1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Replace sensor.

Limit values for sensor relaxation time
(fluorescence decay time) exceeded/
undershot
Reasons: high oxygen content, incorrect
calibration
1.

133

134

Endress+Hauser

Sensor signal

Sensor signal

F

M

On

On

Off

Off

O (opt.)O (opt.)Repeat calibration.

2.

Replace sensor cap.

3.

Contact Service Department.

No signal (fluorescence decay)
1.

Replace sensor cap.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Low signal amplitude. Measurement canstill take place.
1.

Replace sensor cap.

2.

Contact Service Department.

145

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

135

Sensor temp. low

S

On

Off

O

Temperature outside specification

136

Sensor temp. high

S

On

Off

O, Spc1.

Check process.

2.

Check installation.

137

Sensor LED

F

On

Off

O (opt.)Sensor LED: no voltage‣ Contact Service Department.
138

Sensor LED

F

On

Off

O (opt.)Sensor LED: no power‣ Contact Service Department.
140

Sensor check

F

On

Off

O

Sensor range errors‣ Contact Service Department.
141

Polarization

F

On

Off

C (cond.)Polarization warning
The measured value is corrupted at highconductivity levels.

‣ Use a sensor with a larger cell
constant.

142

143

144

Sensor signal

Sensor check

Conductivity range

F

F

S

On

On

Off

Off

Off

On

C

C

C

Reasons: sensor in air, sensor defective
1.

Check installation.

2.

Replace sensor.

Sensor self-test error
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Conductivity outside measuring range‣ Use a sensor with a suitable cell
constant.

146

147

Sensor temperature S

Sensor check

F

Off

On

Off

On

C, N, T, S,
FL

C (ind.)Temperature outside specification
1.

Check the temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Replace sensor type.

Coil transmission current too highReasons: transmission coil short-circuit,inductance too low

148

149

151

152

Sensor check

Sensor LED

Sensor buildup

Sensor data invalid

F

F

F

M

On

On

On

Off

On

On

On

Off

C (ind.)TT

C (ind.)1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Reasons: transmission coil interrupted,
inductance too high1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Sensor LED error
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Buildup, high degree of contamination
1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Replace sensor.

3.

Contact Service Department.

No calibration data

‣ Perform air set calibration.

146

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

No.

153

Message

Sensor defective

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

N, T, S

Sensorlamp defective
Reasons: aging, end of operating life,mechanical disturbance/vibration

154

Sensor data invalid

M

Off

Off

C

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Factory calibration is used

‣ Calibrate.
155

Sensor defective

F

On

On

N, T, S

Sensor defective
Error with analog evaluation

156

Organic pollution

F

On

On

N, T, S

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Excessive organic fouling
Reasons: sensor fouling, high organic
content, incorrect orientation

157

Filter change

M

On

Off

N, S

1.

Clean sensor

2.

Install automatic cleaning.

3.

Check application.

Optical filter must be replaced
Reasons: long period of operation,
moisture in sensor‣ Contact Service Department.
158

159

Sensor check

Sensor check

F

F

On

On

Off

Off

N, T, S

N, T, S

Invalid measured value
1.

Check sensor power supply.

2.

Restart the device.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Uncertain measured value
Reasons: sensor fouling, incorrect
application

160

161

Sensor data invalid

Filter change

F

F

On

On

Off

Off

N, T, S, DI,
SC, FLN, T, S

1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check application.

No calibration data
Reasons: data deleted
1.

Select other data record.

2.

Use factory calibration.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Filter needs to be changed
Reasons: long period of operation,
moisture in sensor‣ Contact Service Department.

Endress+Hauser

162

Install.factor

M

On

Off

C (ind.)163

Install.factor

M

On

Off

C (ind.)Installation factor exceeded/undershot,alarm
Reason: distance between wall andsensor too small (< 15 mm)
1.

Check pipe diameter.

2.

Clean sensor.

3.

Calibrate sensor.

147

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

164

Message

Sensor data invalid

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial actionC

No temperature calibration data
Factory calibration is used

168

Polarization

S

On

Off

C (cond.)1.

Check process.

2.

Check or replace sensor.

Polarization warning
The measured value is corrupted at highconductivity levels.

‣ Use a sensor with a larger cell
constant.

169

170

Operating time

Operating time

M

M

On

On

Off

Off

S

S

Operating hours, conc. > 200 mg/l,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours, conc. < 50 mg/l,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

171

Lamp change

M

On

Off

N, T, S, SC

Lamp change recommended

172

Echo lost

F

On

On

U

Echo signal lost173

Sludge level

F

On

On

U

Incorrect separation zone measurement‣ Replace sensor.
174

Turbid. failure

F

On

On

U

Incorrect turbidity measurement‣ Replace sensor.
175

Wiper failure

F

On

On

U

Wiper not working‣ Clean or replace sensor.
176

177

178

179

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

DI

DI

DI

P

Operating hours > 100 nA, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 20 nA, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 15 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 300 mV,
measurement can still take place
1.

148

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

No.

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

Endress+Hauser

Message

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

P

Operating hours < -300 mV,
measurement can still take place

O (opt.)O (opt.)O (amp.)O (amp.)O (amp.)O (amp.)

C

C, O

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours < 25 µS, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 40 µS, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 10 nA (COS51D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 30 nA (COS22D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 40 nA (COS51D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 160 nA (COS22D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 80 °C, 100 nS/cm,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours < 5 °C, measurement canstill take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

149

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

150

Message

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O

Operating hours > 5 °C, measurement canstill take placeO

O, I, DI

O, I

P, C, O

P

C

C

C

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 25 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 30 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 40 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 80 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 100 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 120 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 125 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 140 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

No.

198

199

Message

Operating time

Operating time

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

C

Operating hours > 150 °C, measurement
can still take place

All except
U1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

The limit set for the total operating hours
has been reached. Measurement can stilltake place.
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

215

Simulation active

C

On

Off

All

Simulation active
End simulation by changing to measuring
mode.

408

Calibration aborted

M

Off

Off

P, C, O, I,
DI

Calibration aborted

500

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

All, except
SC, FL

Calibration aborted, main measured
value varies
Reasons: sensor too old, sensor
occasionally dry, calibration value notconstant

501

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

1.

Check sensor.

2.

Check calibration solution.

Calibration aborted, temperature
measured value varies
Reasons: sensor too old, sensor
occasionally dry, temperature ofcalibration solution not constant505

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check sensor.

2.

Regulate calibration solution
temperature.

Max. zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated507

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Min. zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminatedEndress+Hauser

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

151

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

509

Message

Sensor calibration

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

P, O, I, DI

Min. slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated511

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Max. slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated513

Zero warning

M

On

Off

O (amp.),DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Zero point warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated515

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P (ISFET)

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Max. operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated517

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P (ISFET)

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Min. operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated

152

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

No.

518

Message

Sensor calibration

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

P, O, I, DI

Delta slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated520

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Delta zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated522

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P (ISFET)

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Delta operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated534Electrolyte warning M

On

Off

DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Electrolyte consumption warning
The limit set for the electrolyte capacity
has been reached.

535

Sensor check

M

On

Off

O (amp.),DI

1.

Replace electrolyte.

2.

Reset consumption counter.

3.

Replace sensor.

Specified number of cap calibrations isreachedMeasurement can still take place.

‣ Replace sensor cap.
550

Process
temperature

S

On

On

C

551

Process
temperature

S

On

On

C

552

Conductivity low

S

On

On

C

553

Conductivity high

S

On

On

C

Process temperature above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
Process concentration above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
554

Concentration low

S

On

On

C

555

Concentration high

S

On

On

C

Process concentration above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.

Endress+Hauser

153

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

Process temperature above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete

556

Temperature low

S

On

On

C

557

Temperature high

S

On

On

C

‣ Extend table.
558

Conductivity low

S

On

On

C

559

Conductivity high

S

On

On

C

Process conductivity above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
560

Conduc.
compensation

S

On

On

C

561

Conduc.
compensation

S

On

On

C

Packageincompatible

C

566

Conductivity compensation above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
On

Off

SC

Incompatible model package‣ Check the configuration of theassigned outputs, measuring settings
and application calibration.

720

722

723

Membrane change

Sensor reference

Sensor reference

M

F

M

On

On

On

Off

On

Off

I

P

I

Membrane cap must be replaced
1.

Replace membrane cap.

2.

Reset timer.

Alarm: Reference membrane impedance
too low.
1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Warning: Reference membrane
impedance too low.
Can continue measuring until the alarm
occurs.

724

725

Sensor reference

Sensor reference

F

M

On

On

On

Off

I

I

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Alarm: Reference membrane impedance
too high.
1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Warning: Reference membrane
impedance too high.
Can continue measuring until the alarm
occurs.

154

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

No.

734

Message

Calibration quality

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O (opt.)Warning: The calibration quality index
indicates a substantial change since thelast calibration.
Measurement can still take place.

740

771

Sensor defective

Lamp change

F

F

On

On

On

Off

C (only
four-pinsensor)N, T, S, SC

1.

Repeat calibration.

2.

Check the sensor and replace ifnecessary.

Internal electrode failure
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Lamp change alarm
Configured operating time has beenreached‣ Contact the Service Department tohave the lamp replaced.

772

Lamp change

M

On

Off

Lamp change warning
Possible reasons: remaining lamp
intensity low, lamp service life was notreset after lamp replacement773

Lamp change

F

On

On

1.

Replace lamp and reset lamp
service life.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Lamp change alarm
Possible reasons: remaining lamp
intensity low, lamp service life was notreset after lamp replacement

774

832

841

Endress+Hauser

Lamp defective

Temp. range
exceededOperating range

F

S

S

On

Off

Off

On

Off

Off

1.

Replace lamp and reset lamp
service life.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Possible reasons: cable defective, lamp
defective

All except
U, FL

All except
FL

1.

Check cable.

2.

Replace lamp.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Outside temperature specification
1.

Check application.

2.

Check temperature sensor.

Process value outside operational range
1.

Check application.

2.

Check sensor.

842

Process value

S

Off

Off

P

Process limit value exceeded/undershot

843

Process value

S

Off

Off

P

Reasons: sensor in air, air pockets inassembly, incorrect flow to sensor, sensor
defective
1.

Change process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

155

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

No.

844

Message

Process value

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

S

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

N, T, S

Measured value outside specified range
Reasons: sensor in air, air pockets inassembly, incorrect flow to sensor, sensor
defective

904

914

Process checkalarm

USP/ EP alarm

F

M

On

On

On

Off

All except
Phot

1.

Increase process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Stagnating measuring signal
Reasons: sensor in air, sensor fouling,
incorrect flow to sensor, sensor defective
1.

Check electrode system.

2.

Check sensor.

3.

Restart the device.

C

USP limit values exceeded

915

USP / EP warning

M

On

Off

C

‣ Check process.

934

Process temp. high

S

Off

Off

N, S, U, SC,FL

Process temperature high

935

942

943

944

Process temp. low

Process value

Process value

Sensor range

S

S

S

S

Off

Off

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

N, S, U, SC,
FL

N, P, UN, P, U

S, U, FL

1.

Do not increase processtemperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Process temperature low
1.

Do not lower process temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Process value high1.

Do not increase process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Process value low
1.

Do not decrease process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Measurement at periphery of sensor
dynamic range
Reasons: changes in process to a higher
or lower measuring range

945

946

156

pH value highpH value low

S

S

On

On

Off

Off

DI

DI

1.

Check application.

2.

Use sensor that suits themeasuring range of theapplication.

Warning maximum pH value exceeded1.

Check application.

2.

Check pH sensor.

Warning minimum pH value not reached.
Potential leaking of gaseous chlorine!
1.

Check application.

2.

Check pH sensor.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshootingNo.

Message

950

Process
temperature

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process temperature below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
951

Process
temperature

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process temperature above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
952

Conductivity low

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process conductivity below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
953

Conductivity high

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process conductivity above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
954

Concentration low

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process concentration below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
955

Concentration high

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process concentration above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
983

Sensor ISE check

984

Process temp. high985

Sensor Interface

987

1)
2)
3)

Calibration
required

F

S

F

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

I

I

I

I, DI, SC

Electrode or membrane defective
1.

Check or replace electrode.

2.

Check or replace membrane cap.

Temperature outside specification
1.

Check process temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

Sensor interface error
1.

Check connector.

2.

Check or replace cable.

A calibration is required due to sensor
maintenance.

Status signal
Diagnostic message
Failure current

12.7

Pending diagnostic messages

The Diagnostics menu contains all the information on the device status.
Furthermore, various service functions are available.

Endress+Hauser

157

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

The following messages are directly displayed every time you enter the menu:• Most important message
Diagnostic message recorded with the highest criticality level• Past message
Diagnostic message whose cause is no longer present.
All the other functions in the Diagnostics menu are described in the following chapters.

12.8

Diagnostics list

All the current diagnostic messages are listed here.
A time stamp is available for each message. Furthermore, the user also sees theconfiguration and description of the message as saved in Menu/Setup/General settings/
Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior .

12.9

Event logbook

12.9.1

Available logbooks

Types of logbooks• Logbooks physically available (all apart from the overall logbook)• Database view of all logbooks (= overall logbook)
Logbook

Visible inMax.
entriesCan bedisabled 1

Logbook
can bedeletedEntriescan bedeletedCan beexported)

Overall logbook

All events

20000

Yes

No

Yes

No

Calibration logbook

Calibration events

75

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Operation logbook

Configuration events

250

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Diagnostics logbook

Diagnostic events

10000

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Version logbook

All events

50

No

No

No

Yes

Hardware version
logbookAll events

125

No

No

No

Yes

Data logbook for
sensors (optional)

Data logbooks

150 000

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Debugging logbook

Debug events
1000(only accessible byentering the special
service activation code)

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

1)

Data in brackets means this depends on the overall logbook

12.9.2

Logbooks menu

DIAG/Logbooks
Function

Options

All events

158

Info
Chronological list of all the logbook entries, withinformation on the type of event

Show

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

DIAG/Logbooks
Function

Options

Calibration events

Info
Chronological list of the calibration eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can delete all the calibration logbook entries
here.

Configuration events

Chronological list of the configuration eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can use this to delete all the operation
logbook entries.

Diagnostic events

Chronological list of the diagnostics eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can use this to delete all the diagnostics
logbook entries.

You can also view your data logbook entries graphically on the display (Show plot).
You can also adapt the display to suit your individual requirements:• Press the navigator button in the graphic display: you are given additional options suchas the zoom function and x/y movement of the graph.
• Define the cursor: if you select this option, you can move along the graph with thenavigator and view the logbook entry (data stamp/measured value) in text form forevery point in the graph.
• Simultaneous display of two logbooks: Select 2nd plot and Show plot
• A small cross marks the currently selected graph for which the zoom can be changed
or a cursor used, for example.
• In the context menu (press the navigator button), you can select the other graph. You
can then apply the zoom function, a movement or a cursor to this graph.
• Using the context menu, you can also select both graphs simultaneously. This enables
you to use the zoom function on both graphs simultaneously, for example.

Endress+Hauser

159

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

126.00nA

34.00
nA
09.11.2011
14:02:20

23.11.2011
11:25:32

09.11.2011
14:02:20

23.11.2011
11:25:32

12.00
pH

6.00
pH

A0016688

 98

Simultaneous display of two graphs, the top one is selected

DIAG/Logbooks
Function

Options

Data logbooks

Info
Chronological list of the data logbook entries forsensors

Data logbook 1 ... 8<Logbook name>

This submenu is available for each data logbookthat you have set up and activated.

Source of data

Read only

Input or mathematical function is displayed

Measured value

Read only

Measured value being recorded is displayed

Log time left

Read only

Display of days, hours and minutes until logbook
is full.

‣ Pay attention to the information on

selecting the memory type in the menu
General settings/Logbooks.

Show

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Show plot

Graphic display of thelogbook entries

The display is according to your settings in themenu General settings/Logbooks.

Select 2nd plot

Select another datalogbookYou can view a second logbook at the same timeas the current one.

ActionYou can use this to delete all data logbook
entries.

Selection
• CSV
• FDM

‣ Save the logbook in the preferred file

Delete all entries
Save logbooks
File format

160

format.

You can then open the saved CSV file on the PC
in MS Excel, for example, and make further edits
here. 1). You can import the FDM files into
FieldCare and archive them so that they aretamper-proof.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

DIAG/Logbooks
Function
All data logbooks
Data logbook 1 ... 8
All event logbooks
Calibration logbook
Diagnostic logbook
Configuration logbook
HW version logbook
Version logbook

Options

Info

Action,commences as soon as theoption is selected

Use this function to save the logbook to an SD
card.

‣ Save the logbook in the preferred fileformat. You can then open the saved CSV
file on the PC in MS-Excel, for example, andedit it. You can import the FDM files into
Fieldcare and archive them so they aretamper-proof.

file name is made up of the Logbook ident (Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks), an Theabbreviation for the particular logbook and a time stamp.
1)

CSV files use international number formats and separators. Therefore they must be imported into MS
Excel as external data with the correct format settings. If you double-click the file to open it, the data are
only displayed correctly if MS Excel is installed with the US country setting.

12.10 Simulation
You can simulate values at inputs and outputs for testing purposes:• Current values at current outputs• Measured values at inputs• Relay contact opening or closing
Only current values are simulated. Via the simulation function, it is not possible tocalculate the totalized value for the flow or rainfall.
DIAG/Simulation
Function

Options

Current output x:y
Simulation

Info
Simulation of an output current
This menu appears once for each current output.

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the value at the current output,
this is indicated on the display by a simulation
icon in front of the current value.

Factory setting
Off
Current

2.4 to 23.0 mA‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Factory setting
4 mA
Alarm relay
Relay x:y
Simulation

Simulation of a relay stateThis menu appears once for each relay.
Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the relay state, this is indicatedon the display by a simulation icon in front of
the relay display.

Factory setting
Off
State

Selection• Low• HighFactory setting
Low

Endress+Hauser‣ Set the desired simulation value.
The relay switches in accordance with yoursetting when you switch on the simulation. On
the measured value display, you see On (= Low)
or Off(= High) for the simulated relay state.

161

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

DIAG/Simulation
Function

Options

Meas. inputs

Simulation of a measured value (only forsensors)
This menu appears once for each measuring
input.

Channel : parameter

Simulation

Info

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the measured value, this isindicated on the display by a simulation icon in
front of the measured value.

Factory setting
Off
Main value

Depends on the sensor‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Sim. temperature

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the temperature measured value,
this is indicated on the display by a simulation
icon in front of the temperature.

Factory setting
Off
Temperature-50.0 to +250.0 °C(-58.0 to 482.0 °F)‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Factory setting
20.0 °C (68.0 °F)
Binary input x:yBinary output x:y
Simulation

Simulation of a binary input or output signal
The number of submenus available corresponds
to the number of binary inputs or outputs.
Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

State

Selection• Low• High12.11 Device test
DIAG/System test
Function

Options

Info

Photometer
Cleaning factor
Power supply

162

Read only
Read only• Digital supply 1: 1.2V
• Digital supply 2: 3.3V
• Analog supply: 12.5V• Sensor supply: 24V• Temperature

Detailed list of power supply to instrument.
actual values can vary without a Themalfunction being present.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

DIAG/System test
Function

Options

Heartbeat

Info
Heartbeat has no effect on the outputs and theirstatus. You can start the verification at any time
without affecting the measurement.

Perform verification

Starts verification.

Verification results

1.

To save the results, press OK.
 Results displayed (see below)

2.

Ensure that the writable SD card isinserted in the device's card reader.
Export to SD-card.
 Results are written to the SD card in
the form of a PDF file. Display
indicates if this was successful or not.

3.

If export fails:
Check SD card; use a different SD card ifnecessary. Check SD compartment on basemodule.

Result display• Plant operator
Customized text, maximum 32 characters• Location
Customized text, maximum 32 characters• Verification report
Automatic time stamp• Verification ID
Automatic counter• Overall result
Passed or failed

Export to SDcard

Export the verification report as a pdf file• Detailed report on various device tests• Input and output information• Device information• Sensor information
The report is ready to be printed out and signed.
You can file it immediately in an operations log,
for example.

12.12 Resetting the measuring device
DIAG/Reset
FunctionEndress+Hauser

Options

Info

Device restart

Selection
• OK
• ESC

Restart and keep all the settings

Factory default

Selection
• OK
• ESC

Restart with factory settings
Settings that have not been saved are lost.

163

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

12.13 Device information
12.13.1 System information
DIAG/System information
Function

Options

Info

Device tag

Read only

Individual device tag → General
settings

Order code

Read only

You can order identical hardware
with this code.
This code changes on account ofchanges to the hardware and you
can enter the new code you received
from the manufacturer here 1).

To establish the version of your device, enter the order code into the search screen at the following
 address:www.endress.com/order-ident
Orig. order code ext.

Read only

Complete order code for the original
device, resulting from the productstructure.

Current order code ext.

Read only

Current code, taking into accountchanges to the hardware. You mustenter this code yourself.

Serial number

Read only

The serial number allows you toaccess device data anddocumentation on the Internet:
www.endress.com/device-viewer

Software version

Read only

Current version

Read only• Bus address• Unique address• Manufacturer ID• Device type
• Device revision• Software revision

HART‐specific information
The unique address is linked to theserial number and is used to accessdevices in a Multidrop environment.
Device and software version
numbers are incremented as soon aschanges have been made.

Read only• Enable• Bus address• Termination• Modbus TCP Port 502

Modbus‐specific information

Read only• Termination• Bus address• Ident number• Baudrate• DPV0 state• DPV0 fault• DPV0 master addr
• DPV0 WDT [ms]Module status and other PROFIBUSspecific information

HART
Only with the HART option

ModbusOnly with the Modbus option

PROFIBUS
Only with the PROFIBUS option

164

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

DIAG/System information
Function
Ethernet
Only with the Ethernet, EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP, Modbus RS485 or PROFIBUS
DP or PROFINET option

Options

Info

Read only• Enable• Webserver• Link settings• DHCP• IP-Address• Netmask• Gateway• Service switch• MAC-Address• EtherNetIP Port 44818• Modbus TCP Port 502• Webserver TCP port 80

Ethernet‐specific information
Display depends on the fieldbus
protocol used.

PROFINET
Only with the PROFINET option
Name of station
SD cardRead only
Read only• Total• Free memory

System modules
Backplane
Base
Display module
Extension module 1 ... 8
Sensors

Read only• Description• Serial number• Order code
• Hardware version• Software version

This information is provided forevery electronics module available.
Specify the serial numbers and ordercodes when servicing, for example.

Read only• Description• Serial number• Order code
• Hardware version• Software version

This information is provided forevery sensor available. Specify theserial numbers and order codeswhen servicing, for example.

File name assigned
automatically (includes atime stamp)

The information is saved on the SD
card in a "sysinfo" subfolder.
The csv file can be read and edited
in MS Excel, for example. This filecan be used when servicing thedevice.

Save system information
Save to SD card

Endress+Hauser

165

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

DIAG/System information
Function

Options

Heartbeat operation

DeviceInfo
Heartbeat functions are only
available with the appropriate
device version or optional access
code.

Read only• Total operating time
• Counters since reset• Availability• Operating time
• Time in failure• Number of failures• MTBF• MTTR•
Reset counters

Availability
Percentage of time no error with thestatus signal F was pending(Operating time - Time in
failure)*100% /Operating time
Time in failure
Total amount of time an error withthe status signal F was pending
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures(Operating time - Time in failure)/
Number of failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
Time in failure/Number of
failures1)

Provided you give the manufacturer all the information about changes to the hardware.

12.13.2 Sensor information‣ Select the required channel from the list of channels.
Information in the following categories is displayed:• Extreme values
Extreme conditions to which the sensor was previously exposed, e.g. min./max.
temperatures 3)• Operating time
Operating time of the sensor under defined extreme conditions• Calibration information
Calibration data of the last calibration
Calibration data of the factory calibration 4)• Sensor specifications
Measuring range limits for main measured value and temperature• General information
Information on sensor identification
The specific data that are displayed depends on what sensor is connected.

3)
4)

166

Not available for all sensor types.
Not available for all sensor types.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

12.14 Firmware history
Date

VersionChanges to firmware

Documentation

12/2019 01.07.00 Expansion
BA01570C/07/EN/07.19• Support for new BASE2 module
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13• PROFINET
BA01245C/07/EN/08.20• New sensor Memosens Wave CAS80E• New sensor Memosens Wave CKI50• Time switch for binary process values depending on timebased conditions
Improvement• Maximum character length for formula mathematical
function has been extended to 255 characters• Heartbeat device status also via fieldbus• Heartbeat Verification: Status "not activated" redefined• Single-point calibration for pH sensors adapted to process
and logbook behavior of CM42
• Format of delta time extended to seconds
01/2019 01.06.08 Improvement
BA01570C/07/EN/05.19• Heartbeat verification no longer affects outputs
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13• Graphic display of Heartbeat status also in integrated web BA01245C/07/EN/06.19
server• Limit values for electrolyte depletion for amperometric
oxygen sensors• Limit values for CIP cycles for 4-pin conductivity sensors
05/2018 01.06.06 Improvement
BA01570C/07/EN/04.18• New soft keys ALL and NONE in multiple choice editors
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13• Manual factor for CAS51D nitrate
BA01245C/07/EN/05.17• Calibration timer and validity revised for pH, conductivity,
oxygen and disinfection• Clear distinction between offset and 1-point calibration
for pH• Heartbeat verification report can now also be downloaded
via the web server• Better description of diagnostics code 013
06/2017 01.06.04 Expansion• Heartbeat Monitoring and Verification• New mathematical function Formula• New sensors: CUS50D and chlorine dioxide• Calibration via Ethernet/IP• PDF generator for Heartbeat• Sample calibration CAS51D• OUSAF46 with Easycal

BA01570C/07/EN/03.17
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/05.17

Improvement• Changes to conductivity concentration tables• Renaming of parameter chlorine → Disinfection• Last active measuring screen restored after reboot• Cap and electrolyte replacements are logged in thecalibration logbook (oxygen, disinfection)• Manual factor for nitrate

Endress+Hauser

167

Diagnosis and troubleshooting

Liquiline CM44P

Date

VersionChanges to firmware

12/2016 01.06.03 Expansion• EasyCal filter recertification date visible in the DIAG/
Sensor information/Operating time menu
• Sensor calibration via Modbus or Ethernet/IP:
conductivity, oxygen, chlorine and turbidity• Four-factor adjustment, SAC• Flash meter, nitrate and SAC• New sludge model CUS51D

Documentation
BA01570C/07/EN/02.16
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/04.16

Improvement• Local display can be locked via Modbus or Ethernet/IP• The output status can also be recorded in the datalogbook• Name of Endress+Hauser pH buffer 9.18 changed to 9.22
• CUS51D factor can be read out via fieldbus
03/2016 01.06.00 Original firmware
Expansion• Heartbeat verification• User-configurable diagnostic modules• Four-factor adjustment, SAC• Offset calibration CUS71D• New mathematical function, cation exchanger• Configurable byte order for Modbus

BA01570C/07/EN/01.16
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/03.16

Improvement• Sensor calibration validity check (adaptation to batchprocesses)• pH-Offset can be saved in either the sensor or thetransmitter (previously only possible in the transmitter)• CUS71D screens (gain display, trend information)• Modified menu texts

LZ4 Library
Copyright (c) 2011-2016, Yann Collet
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, arepermitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

168

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Maintenance

13

Maintenance

Effects on process and process control‣ Take all the necessary precautions in time to ensure the operational safety andreliability of the entire measuring point.
The maintenance of the measuring point comprises:• Calibration• Cleaning the controller, assembly and sensor• Checking cables and connections.

LWARNING
Process pressure and temperature, contamination, electrical voltage
Risk of serious or fatal injury‣ Avoid hazards posed by pressure, temperature and contamination.
‣ Make sure the device is de-energized before you open it.
‣ Power can be supplied to switching contacts from separate circuits. De-energize thesecircuits before working on the terminals.
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Risk of damaging the electronic components‣ Take personal protective measures to avoid ESD, such as discharging beforehand at PEor permanent grounding with a wrist strap.
For
your own safety, use only genuine spare parts. With genuine parts, the function,‣accuracy and reliability are also ensured after maintenance work.

13.1

Cleaning

13.1.1 Controller‣ Clean the front of the housing using commercially available cleaning agents only.
The front of the housing is resistant to the following in accordance with DIN 42 115:• Ethanol (for a short time)• Diluted acids (max. 2% HCl)
• Diluted bases (max. 3% NaOH)• Soap-based household cleaning agents
NOTICE
Cleaning agents not permitted
Damage to the housing surface or housing seal
‣ Never use concentrated mineral acids or alkaline solutions for cleaning.
‣ Never use organic cleaners such as acetone, benzyl alcohol, methanol, methylene
chloride, xylene or concentrated glycerol cleaner.
Neveruse high-pressure steam for cleaning.
‣

13.1.2

Digital sensors

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.

Endress+Hauser

169

Maintenance

Liquiline CM44P

Replacing the sensor while ensuring measuring point availability
If an error occurs or the maintenance schedule stipulates that the sensor has to be
replaced, use a new sensor, or a sensor that has been precalibrated in the laboratory.
• A sensor is calibrated in the laboratory under optimum external conditions, thereby
ensuring better quality of measurement.
• You must perform onsite calibration if you use a sensor that is not precalibrated.
1.

Pay attention to the safety instructions regarding the removal of the sensor that areprovided in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.

2.

Remove the sensor that requires maintenance.

3.

Install the new sensor.
 The sensor data are automatically accepted by the transmitter. A release code is
not required.
Measurement is resumed.

4.

Take the used sensor back to the laboratory.
 In the laboratory get the sensor ready for reuse while ensuring the availability ofthe measuring point.

Prepare the sensor for reuse
1.

Clean sensor.
 For this purpose, use the cleaning agent specified in the sensor manual.

2.

Inspect the sensor for cracks or other damage.

3.

If no damage is found, regenerate the sensor. Where necessary, store the sensor in aregeneration solution (→ sensor manual).

4.

Recalibrate the sensor for reuse.

13.1.3

Assemblies

Refer to the assembly operating instructions for information on servicing andtroubleshooting the assembly. The assembly operating manual describes theprocedure for mounting and disassembling the assembly, replacing the sensors andseals, and contains information on the material resistance properties, as well as onspare parts and accessories.

170

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Repair14

Repair

14.1

General notes

The repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The product has a modular design• Spare parts are grouped into kits which include the associated kit instructions• Only use original spare parts from the manufacturer• Repairs are carried out by the manufacturer's Service Department or by trained users• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified device versions by the
manufacturer's Service Department or at the factory• Observe applicable standards, national regulations, Ex documentation (XA) andcertificates
1.

Carry out the repair according to the kit instructions.

2.

Document the repair and conversion and enter, or have entered, in the Life Cycle
Management tool (W@M).

14.2

Spare parts

Device spare parts that are currently available for delivery can be found on the website:
https://portal.endress.com/webapp/SparePartFinder‣ Quote the serial number of the device when ordering spare parts.

14.3

ReturnThe product must be returned if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if thewrong product was ordered or delivered. As an ISO-certified company and also due to legal
regulations, Endress+Hauser is obliged to follow certain procedures when handling any
returned products that have been in contact with medium.
To ensure the swift, safe and professional return of the device:‣ Refer to the website www.endress.com/support/return-material for information on theprocedure and conditions for returning devices.

14.4

Disposal

The device contains electronic components. The product must be disposed of as electronic
waste.

‣ Observe the local regulations.
Dispose of batteries correctly‣ Always dispose of batteries in accordance with local regulations on battery disposal.

Endress+Hauser

171

Accessories

Liquiline CM44P

15

Accessories

The following are the most important accessories available at the time this documentation
was issued.
Listed accessories are technically compatible with the product in the instructions.
1.

Application-specific restrictions of the product combination are possible.
Ensure conformity of the measuring point to the application. This is the responsibilityof the operator of the measuring point.

2.

Pay attention to the information in the instructions for all products, particularly thetechnical data.

3.

For accessories not listed here, please contact your Service or Sales Center.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1

Measuring cables

Memosens data cable CYK10• For digital sensors with Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cyk10
Technical Information TI00118C
Memosens data cable CYK11• Extension cable for digital sensors with Memosens protocol• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cyk11
Technical Information TI00118C

15.1.2

Sensors

Glass electrodes
Memosens CPS11E• pH sensor for standard applications in process and environmental engineering• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps11e
Technical Information TI01493C
Memosens CPS41E• pH sensor for process technology• With ceramic junction and KCl liquid electrolyte• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps41e
Technical Information TI01495C
Memosens CPS71E• pH sensor for chemical process applications• With ion trap for poison-resistant reference• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps71e
Technical Information TI01496C

172

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Accessories

Memosens CPS91E• pH sensor for heavily polluted media• With open aperture• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps91e
Technical Information TI01497C
Memosens CPS31E• pH sensor for standard applications in drinking water and swimming pool water• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps31e
Technical Information TI01574C
Memosens CPS61E• pH sensor for bioreactors in life sciences and for the food industry• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps61e
Technical Information TI01566C
Memosens CPF81E• pH sensor for mining operations, industrial water and wastewater treatment• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpf81e
Technical Information TI01594C
Enamel pH electrodes
Ceramax CPS341D• pH electrode with pH-sensitive enamel• Meets highest demands of measuring accuracy, pressure, temperature, sterility anddurability• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps341d
Technical Information TI00468C
ORP sensors
Memosens CPS12E• ORP sensor for standard applications in process and environmental engineering• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps12e
Technical Information TI01494C
Memosens CPS42E• ORP sensor for process technology• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps42e
Technical Information TI01575C
Memosens CPS72E• ORP sensor for chemical process applications• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps72e
Technical Information TI01576C

Endress+Hauser

173

Accessories

Liquiline CM44P

Memosens CPF82E• ORP sensor for mining operations, industrial water and wastewater treatment• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpf82e
Technical Information TI01595C
Memosens CPS92E• ORP sensor for use in heavily polluted media• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps92e
Technical Information TI01577C
Memosens CPS62E• ORP sensor for hygienic and sterile applications• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps62e
Technical Information TI01604C
pH-ISFET sensors
Memosens CPS47E• ISFET sensor for pH measurement• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps47e
Technical Information TI01616C
Memosens CPS77E• Sterilizable and autoclavable ISFET sensor for pH measurement• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps77e
Technical Information TI01396
Memosens CPS97E• ISFET sensor for pH measurement• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps97e
Technical Information TI01618C
pH and ORP combined sensors
Memosens CPS16E• pH/ORP sensor for standard applications in process technology and environmental
engineering• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps16e
Technical Information TI01600C
Memosens CPS76E• pH/ORP sensor for process technology• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps76e
Technical Information TI01601C

174

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Accessories

Memosens CPS96E• pH/ORP sensor for heavily polluted media and suspended solids• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps96e
Technical Information TI01602C
Conductivity sensors with inductive measurement of conductivity
Indumax CLS50D• High-durability inductive conductivity sensor• For standard and hazardous area applications• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls50d
Technical Information TI00182C
Indumax H CLS54D• Inductive conductivity sensor• With certified, hygienic design for foodstuffs, beverages, pharmaceuticals andbiotechnology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls54d
Technical Information TI00508C
Conductivity sensors with conductive measurement of conductivity
Memosens CLS15E• Digital conductivity sensor for measurements in pure and ultrapure water• Conductive measurement• With Memosens 2.0• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls15e
Technical Information TI01526C
Memosens CLS16E• Digital conductivity sensor for measurements in pure and ultrapure water• Conductive measurement• With Memosens 2.0• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls16e
Technical Information TI01527C
Memosens CLS21E• Digital conductivity sensor for media with medium or high conductivity• Conductive measurement• With Memosens 2.0• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls21e
Technical Information TI01528C
Memosens CLS82E• Hygienic conductivity sensor• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls82e
Technical Information TI01529C

Endress+Hauser

175

Accessories

Liquiline CM44P

Oxygen sensors
Memosens COS22E• Hygienic amperometric oxygen sensor with maximum measurement stability overmultiple sterilization cycles• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos22e
Technical Information TI01619C
Memosens COS51E• Amperometric oxygen sensor for water, wastewater and utilities• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos51e
Technical Information TI01620C
Oxymax COS61D• Optical oxygen sensor for drinking water and industrial water measurement• Measuring principle: quenching• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos61d
Technical Information TI00387C
Memosens COS81E• Hygienic optical oxygen sensor with maximum measurement stability over multiple
sterilization cycles• Digital with Memosens 2.0 technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos81e
Technical Information TI01558C
Disinfection sensors
Memosens CCS51D• Sensor for measuring free available chlorine• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/ccs51d
Technical Information TI01423C
Ion-selective sensors
ISEmax CAS40D• Ion selective sensors• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cas40d
Technical Information TI00491C
Turbidity sensors
Turbimax CUS51D• For nephelometric measurements of turbidity and solids in wastewater• 4-beam scattered light method• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus51d
Technical Information TI00461C

176

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Accessories

Turbimax CUS52D• Hygienic Memosens sensor for turbidity measurement in drinking water, process waterand in utilities• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus52d
Technical Information TI01136C
SAC and nitrate sensors
Viomax CAS51D• SAC and nitrate measurement in drinking water and wastewater• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cas51d
Technical Information TI00459C
Interface measurement
Turbimax CUS71D• Immersion sensor for interface measurement• Ultrasonic interface sensor• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus71d
Technical Information TI00490C
Spectrometer sensors
Memosens Wave CAS80E• Measurement of various parameters in liquid media• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cas80e
Technical Information TI01522C
Fluorescence sensors
Memosens CFS51• Sensor for fluorescence measurement• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cfs51
Technical Information TI01630C

15.2

Communication-specific accessories

Device Care SFE100• Configuration of Endress+Hauser devices• Fast and easy installation, online application updates, one-click connection to devices• Automatic hardware identification and driver catalog update• Device configuration with DTMs
Technical Information Device Care SFE100, TI01134S
Commubox FXA195
Intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB port
Technical Information TI00404F

Endress+Hauser

177

Accessories

Liquiline CM44P

Commubox FXA291
Connects the CDI interface of measuring devices with the USB port of the computer or
laptopTechnical Information TI00405C
Wireless HART adapter SWA70• Wireless device connection• Easily integrated, offers data protection and transmission safety, can be operated inparallel with other wireless networks, minimum cabling complexity
Technical Information TI00061S
Field Data Manager Software MS20/21• PC software for central data management• Visualization of series of measurements and logbook events• SQL database for secure data storage
FieldCare SFE500• Universal tool for field device configuration and management• Supplied with a complete library of certified DTMs (Device Type Manager) for operationof Endress+Hauser field devices• Order according to product order structure• www.endress.com/sfe500
Memobase Plus CYZ71D• PC software to support laboratory calibration• Visualization and documentation of sensor management• Sensor calibrations stored in database• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cyz71d
Technical Information TI00502C

15.3

Service-specific accessories

15.3.1

Additional functionality

Hardware extension modules
Kit, extension module AOR• 2 x relay, 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA analog output• Order No. 71111053
Kit, extension module 2R• 2 x relay• Order No. 71125375
Kit, extension module 4R• 4 x relay• Order No. 71125376
Kit, extension module 2AO• 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA analog output• Order No. 71135632
Kit, extension module 4AO• 4 x analog output 0/4 to 20 mA• Order No. 71135633
Kit, extension module 2DS• 2 x digital sensor, Memosens• Order No. 71135631
178

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Accessories

Kit, extension module 2AI• 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA analog input• Order No. 71135639
Kit, extension module DIO• 2 x digital input• 2 x digital output• Auxiliary voltage supply for digital output• Order No. 71135638
Upgrade kit, extension module 485DP• Extension module 485DP• PROFIBUS DP• Order No. 71575177
Upgrade kit, extension module 485MB• Extension module 485MB• Modbus RS485• Order No. 71575178
Firmware and activation codes
SD card with Liquiline firmware• Industrial Flash Drive, 1 GB
• Order No. 71127100
You must quote the serial number of the device when ordering the activation code.
Kit CM442: activation code for 2nd digital sensor input
Order No. 71114663
Activation code for feedforward control• Requires current input or fieldbus communication• Order No. 71211288
Activation code for measuring range switch• Requires digital inputs or fieldbus communication• Order No. 71211289
Activation code for ChemocleanPlus• Requires relays or digital outputs or fieldbus communication and optional digital inputs• Order No. 71239104
Activation code for Heartbeat Verification and Monitoring
Order No. 71367524
Activation code for mathematics• Formula editor• Order No. 71367541
Activation code for Ethernet/IP and web server
Order No. XPC0018
Activation code for Modbus TCP and web server
Order No. XPC0020
Activation code for web server for BASE2
Order No. XPC0021
Activation code for PROFINET and web server Base2
Order No. XPC0022
Activation code for HART
Order No. XPC0023
Activation code for Profibus DP for module 485
Order No. XPC0024

Endress+Hauser

179

Accessories

Liquiline CM44P

Activation code for module 485 Modbus RS485
Order No. XPC0025
Activation code for Liquiline inputs/outputs
Order No. XPC0026

15.4

System components

RIA14, RIA16• Field display unit for integration into 4-20 mA circuits• RIA14 in flameproof metal enclosure
Technical Information TI00143R and TI00144R
RIA15• Process display unit, Digital display unit for integration into 4-20 mA circuits• Panel mounting• With optional HART communication
Technical Information TI01043K

15.5

Other accessories

15.5.1

External display 5)

Graphic display• For installation in the control cabinet door or panel• Order number: 71185295
Service display• Portable, for commissioning• Order number: 71185296

15.5.2

SD card• Industrial Flash Drive, 1 GB
• Order number: 71110815

15.5.3

M12 built-in socket and cable junction with Velcro strip

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 built-in socket for digital sensors• Pre-terminated• Order No. 71107456
Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 built-in socket for PROFIBUS DP/Modbus
RS485• B-coded, pre-terminated• Order No. 71140892
Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 built-in socket for Ethernet• D-coded, pre-terminated• Order No. 71140893
Kit: external CDI socket, complete• Retrofit kit for CDI interface, with terminated connecting cables• Order No. 51517507

5)

180

The external display can be selected as an option in the product structure or ordered subsequently as an accessory.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Accessories

Cable junction with Velcro strip• 4 pieces, for sensor cable• Order No. 71092051

Endress+Hauser

181

Technical data

Measured variables

Liquiline CM44P

16

Technical data

16.1

Input

Spectrometer
Color (L*, a*, b*)
Memosens sensors→ Documentation of the connected sensor

Measuring ranges

Spectrometer→ Documentation of the connected sensor
Memosens sensors→ Documentation of the connected sensor

Types of input• Digital sensor inputs for sensors with Memosens protocol• Analog current inputs (optional)• Digital inputs (optional)• Digital sensor inputs for intrinsically safe sensors with Memosens protocol and Ex
approval (optional)
Only the following approved sensors, cables and devices may be connected to theintrinsically safe digital sensor inputs of the sensor communication module 2DS Ex-i:• Memosens cable xYK10, xYK20
The connection of the sensor communication module 2DS Ex-i, which is an associatedapparatus of CM44P, with the Memosens cable xYK10 and xYK20 is certified as asystem.
• Digital Memosens sensors and other Memosens devices• Sensors and devices must meet the specified electrical parameters of the CM44P withthe sensor communication module 2DS Ex-i.
• Sensors and devices excluding xLS50D must be connected with Memosens cablexYK10 or xYK20 via an inductive interface.
• Digital sensor simulator xYP03D
Sensor simulator/ Memocheck simulation tester (type xYP03D) must be used with thefollowing batteries: Duracell MN1500 or Energizer EN91.

Input signal

Depending on version:• 1 x spectrometer• max. 4 x binary sensor signal• 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA (optional), passive, potentially isolated from one another and from thesensor inputs• 0 to 30 V

Cable specification

Cable type
Memosens data cable CYK10 or sensor fixed cable, each with cable end sleeves or M12
circular plug (optional, for field housing)Cable length

182

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Technical data

16.2

Digital inputs, passive

Electrical specification• drawing power (passive)• Galvanically isolated

Span• High: 11 to 30 V DC
• Low: 0 to 5 V DC

Nominal input current

max. 8 mA

PFM function

Minimum pulse width: 500 µs (1 kHz)

Test voltage

500 V

Cable specification

Max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)

16.3

Current input, passiveSpan> 0 to 20 mA

Signal characteristic

LinearInternal resistanceNon-linear

Test voltage

500 V

16.4
Output signal

OutputDepending on version:• 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 4 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 6 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 8 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• Optional HART communication (only via current output 1:1)
HART

Endress+Hauser

Signal encoding

FSK ± 0.5 mA above current signal

Data transmission rate

1200 baud

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Load (communication resistor)

250 Ω

183

Technical data

Liquiline CM44PPROFIBUS DP/RS485
Signal encoding

EIA/TIA-485, PROFIBUS DP-compliant acc. to IEC 61158

Data transmission rate

9.6 kBd, 19.2 kBd, 45.45kBd, 93.75 kBd, 187.5 kBd, 500 kBd,
1.5 MBd, 6 MBd, 12 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connectors

Spring terminal (max. 1.5 mm), bridged internally (T‐function),
optional M12

Bus termination

Internal slide switch with LED display

Modbus RS485
Signal encoding

EIA/TIA-485

Data transmission rate

2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600 and 115,200
baud

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connectors

Spring terminal (max. 1.5 mm), bridged internally (T‐function),
optional M12

Bus termination

Internal slide switch with LED display

Ethernet and Modbus TCP
Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

10/100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

IP address

DHCP (default) or configuration via menu

Ethernet/IP
Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

10/100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

IP address

DHCP (default) or configuration via menu

PROFINET

184

Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

Name of station

Via DCP protocol by means of configuration tool (e.g. Siemens
PRONETA)IP address

Via DCP protocol by means of configuration tool (e.g. Siemens
PRONETA)

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Technical data

Signal on alarm

Adjustable, as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 43• In measuring range 0 to 20 mA (HART is not available with this measuring range):
Failure current from 0 to 23 mA• In measuring range 4 to 20 mA:
Failure current from 2.4 to 23 mA• Factory setting for failure current for both measuring ranges:
21.5 mA

Load

Max. 500 Ω

Linearization/transmission
behavior

Linear

16.5

Digital outputs, passive

Electrical specification• Passive• Open collector, max. 30 V, 15 mA• Maximum voltage drop 3 V

External power supply

When using an onsite auxiliary voltage supply and an onsite digital input:
Recommended minimum auxiliary voltage = 3 V + VIHmin(VIHmin = minimum input voltage required (high-level input voltage)

PFM function

Minimum pulse width: 500 µs (1 kHz)

Auxiliary voltage

Electrical specification• Galvanically isolated• Unregulated, 24 V DC
• Max. 50 mA (per DIO module)

Test voltage

500 V

Cable specification

Max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)

16.6
Span

Current outputs, active

0 to 23 mA
2.4 to 23 mA for HART communication

Signal characteristic

LinearElectrical specification

Output voltage
Max. 24 V
Test voltage
500 V

Endress+Hauser

185

Technical data

Cable specification

Liquiline CM44P

Cable type
Recommended: shielded cable
Cable specification
Max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)

16.7
Electrical specification

Relay outputs

Relay types• 1 single-pin changeover contact (alarm relay)• 2 or 4 single-pin changeover contacts (optional with extension modules)
Maximum load
• Alarm relay: 0.5 A• All other relays: 2.0 A
Relay switching capacity
Base module (Alarm relay)
Switching voltage

Load (max.)

Switching cycles (min.)230 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

0.1 A

700,000

0.5 A

450,000

0.1 A

1,000,000

0.5 A

650,000

0.1 A

500,000

0.5 A

350,000

Switching voltage

Load (max.)

Switching cycles (min.)230 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

0.1 A

700,000

0.5 A

450,000

2A

120,000

0.1 A

1,000,000

0.5 A

650,000

2A

170,000

0.1 A

500,000

0.5 A

350,000

2A

150,000

115 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

24 V DC, L/R = 0 to 1 ms

Extension modules

115 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

24 V DC, L/R = 0 to 1 ms

Cable specification

186

Max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Technical data

16.8
HART

PROFIBUS DP

Modbus RS485

Modbus TCP

Endress+Hauser

Protocol-specific data

Manufacturer ID

11h

Device type

155Dh

Device revision001h

HART version

7.2

Device description files (DD/DTM)

www.endress.com/hart
Device Integration Manager DIM

Device variables

16 user-definable and 16 predefined device variables, dynamic
variables PV, SV, TV, QV

Supported features

PDM DD, AMS DD, DTM, Field Xpert DD

Manufacturer ID

11h

Device type

155Dh

Profile version

3.02

Device database files (GSD files)

www.endress.com/profibus
Device Integration Manager DIM

Output variables

16 AI blocks, 8 DI blocks

Input variables

4 AO blocks, 8 DO blocks

Supported features• 1 MSCY0 connection (cyclical communication, master class 1
to slave)• 1 MSAC1 connection (acyclical communication, master class 1
to slave)• 2 MSAC2 connections (acyclical communication, master class
2 to slave)• Device lock: The device can be locked using the hardware orsoftware.
• Addressing using DIL switches or software• GSD, PDM DD, DTM

ProtocolRTU/ASCII

Function codes

03, 04, 06, 08, 16, 23

Broadcast support for function codes

06, 16, 23

Output data

16 measured values (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value,
status)

Input data

4 setpoints (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value, status),
diagnostic information

Supported features

Address can be configured using switch or software

TCP port

502

TCP connections

3

ProtocolTCP

Function codes

03, 04, 06, 08, 16, 23

Broadcast support for function codes

06, 16, 23

Output data

16 measured values (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value,
status)187

Technical data

Ethernet/IP

Liquiline CM44P

Input data

4 setpoints (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value, status),
diagnostic information

Supported features

Address can be configured using DHCP or software

Log

EtherNet/IP

ODVA certification

Yes

Device profile

Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

Manufacturer ID

0x049Eh

Device type ID

0x109Ch

Polarity

Auto-MIDI-X

Connections

CIP

12

I/O

6

Explicit message 6
Multicast

3 consumers

Minimum RPI

100 ms (default)

Maximum RPI

10000 ms

System integration

EtherNet/IP

EDS

Rockwell

Add-on-Profile Level 3, Faceplate for Factory
Talk SE

Input (T → O)

Device status and diagnostic message withhighest priority

IO data

Measured values:• 16 AI (analog input) + Status + Unit
• 8 DI (discrete input) + Status
Output (O → T)

188

Actuating values:• 4 A0 (analog output) + status + unit
• 8 DO (discrete output) + Status

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44PPROFINET

Endress+Hauser

Technical data

Protocol"Application layer protocol for decentral device periphery anddistributed automation", PNIO Version 2.34

Communication type

100 MBit/s

Conformance Class

Conformance Class B

Netload Class

Netload Class II

Baud rate

Automatic 100 Mbps with full-duplex detection

Cycle times

From 32 ms

Device profile

Application interface identifier 0xF600
Generic device

PROFINET interface

1 port, Realtime Class 1 (RT_CLASS_1)

Manufacturer ID

0x11h

Device type ID

0x859C Dh

Device description files (GSD)

Information and files under:• www.endress.com
On the product page for the device: Documents/Software →Device drivers• www.profibus.com
On the website under Products/Product Finder

Polarity

Auto-polarity for automatic correction of crossed TxD and RxD
pairs

Supported connections• 1 x AR (IO Controller AR)• 1 x AR (IO-Supervisor Device AR connection allowed)• 1 x Input CR (Communication Relation)• 1 x Output CR (Communication Relation)• 1 x Alarm CR (Communication Relation)

Configuration options for measuring device• Web browser• Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare, DeviceCare)• Device master file (GSD), can be read out via the integrated
web server of the measuring device

Configuration of the device name

DCP protocol

Supported functions• Identification & maintenance
Simple device identification via:
• Process control system• Nameplate• Measured value status
The process variables are communicated with a measured
value status• Blinking feature (FLASH_ONCE) via the local display forsimple device identification and assignment• Device operation via operating tools (e.g. FieldCare,
DeviceCare)

System integration

For information on system integration, see the Operating
Instructions• Cyclic data transmission• Overview and description of the modules• Status coding• Startup configuration• Factory setting

189

Technical data

Web server

Liquiline CM44P

The web server enables full access to the device configuration, measured values, diagnostic
messages, logbooks and service data via standard WiFi/WLAN/LAN/GSM or 3G routerswith a user-defined IP address.
TCP port

80

Supported features• Remote-controlled device configuration(1 session)• Save/restore device configuration (via SD card)• Logbook export (file formats: CSV, FDM)
• Access to web server via DTM or Internet Explorer• Login• Web server can be switched off

16.9

Energy supply

Supply voltage

CM44P
Depending on the version,:• 100 to 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum permitted fluctuation of mains supply voltage: ± 15 % of nominal voltage 6)• 24 V DC
Maximum permitted fluctuation of mains supply voltage: + 20/- 15 % of nominal
voltage 6)Power consumption

CM44P
Depending on supply voltage• 100 to 230 V AC:
Max. 73 VA (field device)
Max. 150 VA (cabinet device) 6)• 24 V DC:
Max. 68 W (field device)
Max. 59 W (cabinet device) 6)

Fuse

Fuse not exchangeable

Surge arrester

Integrated overvoltage/lightning protection as per EN 61326-1/-2
Protection category 1 and 3

6)

190

*Specifications only apply if used with power unit supplied by manufacturer.

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Cable entries

Technical data

Cable entries for transmitters for the non-hazardous area
Identification of the cable entry on housing base

Suitable gland

B, C, H, I, 1-8

M16x1.5 mm/NPT3/8"/G3/8

A, D, F, G

M20x1.5 mm/NPT1/2"/G1/2

E

-



M12x1.5 mm
Recommended assignment

H

5

6

7

8

1-8
A
B
C
D,F,G
H
I
E

I

E

C
D

F

G

A
1

2

3

4

B

Sensors 1-8
Power supply
Unrestricted use
RS485 Out or M12 Ethernet
Current outputs and inputs, relays
RS485 In or M12 DP/RS485
Unrestricted use
Do not use

A0018025

Cable entries for transmitters with sensor communication module 2DS Ex-i for thehazardous area
Identification of the cable entry on housing base

Suitable gland

B, C, H, I, 1-8

M16x1.5 mm/NPT3/8"/G3/8

A, D, F, G

M20x1.5 mm/NPT1/2"/G1/2

E

-



M12x1.5 mm

B

A

H

5

6

7

8

I

Recommended assignment
1/2/3
5/6/7

Do not use

4/8
B/F/G/I

Intrinsically safe sensors

A

Power supply

C

RS485 Out or M12 EthernetD

Current outputs and inputs, relays

H

RS485 In or M12 DP/RS485

E

Do not use

E

C
D

F

G

A
1

2

3

4

B

A0045661

 99

A: Non-hazardous area, B: Hazardous area

Do not cross cables for the non-hazardous area and the hazardous area in the
housing. Select a suitable cable entry for the connection.

Endress+Hauser

191

Technical data

Cable specification

Liquiline CM44P

Cable gland

Permitted cable diameterM16x1.5 mm

4 to 8 mm (0.16 to 0.32")

M12x1.5 mm

2 to 5 mm (0.08 to 0.20")

M20x1.5 mm

6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.48")

NPT3/8"4 to 8 mm (0.16 to 0.32")

G3/8

4 to 8 mm (0.16 to 0.32")

NPT1/2"

6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.48")

G1/2

7 to 12 mm (0.28 to 0.48")

Cable glands mounted at the factory are tightened with 2 Nm.
Length of display cable provided (cabinet device only):
3 m (10 ft)
Maximum permitted length of a display cable (cabinet device only):
5 m (16.5 ft)

16.10 Performance characteristics
Response time

Current outputs
t90 = max. 500 ms for an increase from 0 to 20 mA
Current inputs
t90 = max. 330 ms for an increase from 0 to 20 mA
Digital inputs and outputs
t90 = max. 330 ms for an increase from low to highReference temperature

25 °C (77 °F)

Measurement error for
sensor inputs→ Documentation of the connected sensor

Measurement error for
current inputs and outputs

Typical measured errors:< 20 µA (with current values < 4 mA)< 50 µA (with current values 4 to 20 mA)
at 25 ˚C (77˚ F) each
Additional measured error depending on the temperature:< 1.5 µA/K

Frequency tolerance ofdigital inputs and outputs≤ 1%

Resolution of current inputs
and outputs< 5 µA

Repeatability→ Documentation of the connected sensor

192

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Technical data

16.11 Environment
Ambient temperature

Cabinet device• Generally 0 to 50 ˚C (32 to 122 ˚F), with the exception of packages under the following
point in the list
• 0 to 45 ˚C (32 to 113 ˚F) for the following packages:
CM44P-**DINP2M4*A5FI******+...
External display (optional)–20 to 60 ˚C (-4 to 140 ˚F)Field device• Generally –20 to 50 ˚C (-4 to 122 ˚F), with the exception of packages under thefollowing point in the list
• –20 to 45 ˚C (-4 to 113 ˚F) for the following packages:
CM44P-**FIHP2M4*A5FI******+...

Storage temperature

Field device-40 to +80 °C (-40 to 176 °F)
Cabinet device–25 to 85 °C (–13 to 185 °F)

Relative humidity

cabinet device
5 to 85%, not condensing
External display (in installed state)
10 to 95%, not condensing
Field device
10 to 95 %, non-condensing

Degree of protection

cabinet device
IP20
External display
IP66 front-panel, when installed correctly including seal for housing door
Field device
IP66/67, tightness and corrosion resistance in accordance with NEMA TYPE 4X

Climate class

As per IEC 60654-1: B2Vibration resistance

Environmental tests
Vibration test according to DIN EN 60068-2
Vibration test according to DIN EN 60654-3

Endress+Hauser

193

Technical data

Liquiline CM44P

Post or pipe mounting
Frequency range
Amplitude
Test duration
Wall mounting
Frequency range
Amplitude
Test duration
1)

10 to 500 Hz (sinusoidal)
10 to 57.5 Hz:
0.15 mm57.5 to 500 Hz:
2 g 1)
10 frequency cycles/ spatial axis, in 3 spatial axes (1 oct./min)
10 to 150 Hz (sinusoidal)
10 to 12.9 Hz:
0.75 mm
12.9 to 150 Hz:
0.5 g 1)
10 frequency cycles/ spatial axis, in 3 spatial axes (1 oct./min)g ... acceleration due to gravity (1 g ≈ 9.81 m/s2)

Electromagnetic
compatibility

Interference emission and interference immunity as per EN 61326-1, class A for industrial
areas

Electrical safety

Field device
IEC 61010-1, Class I equipment
Low voltage: overvoltage category II
Environment < 3000 m (< 9840 ft) above MSL
Cabinet device
IEC 61010-1, Class I equipment
Low voltage: overvoltage category II
Environment < 2000 m (< 6562 ft) above MSL

Pollution degree

Field device
Pollution level 2cabinet device
Pollution level 2
Optional display
Pollution level 2

Pressure compensation toenvironment field device
onlyFilter made of GORE-TEX used as pressure compensation element
Ensures pressure compensation to environment and guarantees IP protection.

16.12 Mechanical construction
Dimensions→  17→  19194

Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

WeightTechnical data

Field device
Complete device
Individual module
Cabinet device
CM44P (fully configured)
Individual module
External display (excluding cables)
Service display cover
External power unit

Materials

Endress+Hauser

Approx. 2.1 kg (4.63 lbs), depending on the version
Approx. 0.06 kg (0.13 lbs)

Approx. 0.95 kg (2.1 lbs)
Approx. 0.06 kg (0.13 lbs)
Approx. 0.56 kg (1.2 lbs)
0.46 kg (1 lbs)
0.27 to 0.42 kg (0.60 to 0.92 lbs), depending on the
power unit variant

Housing base and DIN rail housing

PC-FR

Display cover

PC-FR

Display film and soft keys (field device)PE

Housing seal
Display seal

EPDM

Soft keys (optional display)

EPDM

Module side panels

PC-FR

Module housing 2DS Ex-i

PC-PBT

Module covers

PBT GF30 FR

Cable mounting rail (field device)
Terminal strip (cabinet device)PBT GF30 FR, stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI304)
Nickel-plated brass

ClampsGround terminals

Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI304)

ScrewsStainless steel 1.4301 (AISI304)

Mounting plate (optional display)

Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI304)

Securing screws (optional display)

Steel, galvanized

Cover for service display (accessories)

EPDM

Cable glands

Polyamide V0 as per UL94

Separation element

PC-PBT GF30

195

IndexLiquiline CM44P

Index
A

Accessories
Additional functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Communication-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Firmware and activation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Hardware extension modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Measuring cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Activation code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Additional functions
Cleaning programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Mathematical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Measuring range switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Time switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Alarm relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Application calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Assignment views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

B

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bus termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

C

Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183, 192
Cable terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Calculated pH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cation exchanger capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installation and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chemoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 114
Chemoclean Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chlorine control with feedforward control . . . . . . . . . 94
Cleaning cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cleaning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cleaning programs
Chemoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Chemoclean Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Manual cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Standard cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Combined chlorine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuration
Binary inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
196

Binary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ConfigureActions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Numerical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Picklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
User-defined text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring
Display behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
User definable screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connection
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fieldbus (PROFIBUS, Modbus 485) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Functional ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Optional modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Protective ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 52
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 106
Controller structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Current inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Current outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

D

Data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Degassed conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Device test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Device-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Device-specific errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostic messages
Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Device-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Outputting via the relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Sensor-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagnostic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 194
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Display behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dual conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

EElectrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Energy supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Connecting the fieldbus (PROFIBUS, Modbus 485) 44
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Protective ground connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Sensor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Surge arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 92, 188
EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Exporting the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

F

Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fieldbus
Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Functional ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

H

Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 91, 187
HART bus address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Heartbeat diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Heartbeat verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Hold settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

I

Identifying the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Input
Current input, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Digital inputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
InputsBinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Current inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Endress+Hauser

Index

L

Laplace representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 99
Loading the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Logbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 158

M

M12 plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Manipulated variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Mathematical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Calculated pH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cation exchanger capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Combined chlorine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Degassed conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dual conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
rH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Measuring range switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Measuring ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 71, 92
Modbus 485
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Modbus RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Modbus TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Mounting
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

N

Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

O

Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Operation
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
OutputCurrent outputs, active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Digital outputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Outputs
Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Current outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
197

IndexModbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

P

Pollution degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Power supply
Connecting optional modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PROFIBUS
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 71, 187
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PROFIBUS variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 189
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PROFINET variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

R

Relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Requirements of the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
rH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

S

SafetyIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Saving the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SensorConnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sensor change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sensor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Sensor-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Settings
Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
HART bus address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
198

Liquiline CM44P

Setup
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Slot and port assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Soft keys in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Spectrometer
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Diagnostic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Standard cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
State-of-the-art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Surge arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
System information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
System integration
Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

T

TAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tag check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Take reference spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Technical data
Current input, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Current outputs, active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Digital inputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Digital outputs, passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Technical personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Terminal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Time switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Types of cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Types of input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

U

Use
Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Non-intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
User definable screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

V

Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Endress+Hauser

Liquiline CM44P

Index

W

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 190
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Endress+Hauser

199

*71625999*
71625999

www.addresses.endress.com